Foreword
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
Copyright 2021 SUBARU CORPORATION
©
B. 1 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
B. 2 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
This manual describes the following vehicle type.
002011
B. 3 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
B. 4 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Table of Contents
Introduction............................................................................................................. 1
Illustrated Index .................................................................................................... 13
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags.......................................................................... 29 Chapter 1
Keys and Doors .................................................................................................... 93
Chapter 2
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................. 123
Chapter 3
Climate Control ................................................................................................... 197
Chapter 4
Audio.................................................................................................................... 209
Chapter 5
Interior Equipment.............................................................................................. 211
Chapter 6
Starting and Operating....................................................................................... 221
Chapter 7
Driving Tips......................................................................................................... 289
Chapter 8
In Case of Emergency ........................................................................................ 301
Chapter 9
Appearance Care ................................................................................................ 331
Chapter 10
Maintenance and Service................................................................................... 337
Chapter 11
Specifications ..................................................................................................... 379
Chapter 12
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 393
Chapter 13
Index .................................................................................................................... 409
Chapter 14
B. 1 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
B. 2 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Introduction
Introduction
Warranties ...............................................................2
Warranties for U.S.A.........................................................2
Warranties for Canada .....................................................2
Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada......................2
How to Use This Owner’s Manual .........................2
Using Your Owner’s Manual............................................2
Safety Warnings ...............................................................3
Safety Symbol...................................................................4
Abbreviation List ..............................................................4
Vehicle Symbols .....................................................5
Safety Precautions When Driving .........................5
Seatbelt and SRS Airbag .................................................5
Child Safety.......................................................................6
Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide).......................7
Drinking and Driving ....................................................... 7
Drugs and Driving............................................................ 8
Driving When Tired or Sleepy......................................... 8
Modification of Your Vehicle .......................................... 8
Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving........................ 9
Driving Vehicles Equipped with Audio System ............ 9
Driving with Pets.............................................................. 9
Tire Pressures.................................................................. 9
Attaching Accessories .................................................... 9
General Information ..............................................10
California Perchlorate Advisory ................................... 10
Noise from under the Vehicle ....................................... 10
Vehicle Data Recorder................................................... 10
Event Data Recorder ..................................................... 11
B. 1 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warranties
2
Warranties
■ Warranties for U.S.A.
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranties
Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
California Emissions Control
Systems Warranties
All warranty information, including appli-
cability, details of coverage and exclu-
sions, is in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.” Read these
warranties carefully.
■ Warranties for Canada
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
SUBARU Limited Warranty
Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including appli-
cability, details of coverage and exclu-
sions, is in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet.” Read these warranties carefully.
■ Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Read these warranties carefully.
How to Use This Owner’s
Manual
■ Using Your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the infor-
mation you want.
Introduction
This chapter informs you general informa-
tion before driving.
Illustrated Index
This chapter informs you about the vehicle
layout with illustrations.
Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS
Airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and Doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
B. 2 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
3
Introduction
– CONTINUED –
Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior Equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and Operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving Tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and
explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of Emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance Care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running prop-
erly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer Information and
Reporting Safety Defects
This chapter informs you about Tire infor-
mation, Uniform tire quality grading stan-
dards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of equipment.
■ Safety Warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better under-
standing of how to use your SUBARU
vehicle safely.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
B. 3 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
How to Use This Owner’s Manual
4
■ Safety Symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
■ Abbreviation List
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
000013
Abbreviation Meaning
ABS Anti-lock brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AT Automatic transmission
BSD Blind Spot Detection
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers
for children
LCA Lane Change Assist
LED Light emitting diode
LHD Left-hand drive
LSD Limited Slip Differential
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
RAB
Reverse Automatic Braking
system
RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RON Research octane number
SRH
Steering Responsive Head-
light
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TFT Thin Film Transistor
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
TRAC Traction Control
Abbreviation Meaning
B. 4 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Vehicle Symbols
5
Introduction
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
"Warning and Indicator Lights" P26.
Safety Precautions When
Driving
■ Seatbelt and SRS Airbag
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seat-
belts" P39.
For the SRS airbag system, refer to
"SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)" P60.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
WARNING
All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the
best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of the
proper position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer very
serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space
for deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
B. 5 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Safety Precautions When Driving
6
■ Child Safety
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passenger
and objects inside the vehicle.
While riding in the vehicle, infants
and small children should always
be seated in the REAR seat in an
infant or child restraint system
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. If a
child is too big for a child
restraint system, the child should
sit in the REAR seat and be
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint system or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS
AIRBAG.
Always lock the passengers’
windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window. Refer to "Windows"
P116.
Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny
days, temperature in a closed
vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to them.
Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
B. 6 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Safety Precautions When Driving
7
Introduction
– CONTINUED –
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seat-
belts" P39.
For the child restraint system, refer to
"Child Restraint Systems" P46.
For the SRS airbag system, refer to
"SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)" P60.
■ Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon
Monoxide)
■
Drinking and Driving
Put children aged 12 and under or
1.5 m (4 feet 11 inches) tall or less
in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are 12
years of age and under or 1.5 m (4
feet 11 inches) tall or less and are
not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
WARNING
Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if
inhaled.
Always properly maintain the
engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system
always works properly.
If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking even if you drink just a lit-
tle it will increase the risk of being
involved in a serious or fatal acci-
dent, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
B. 7 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Safety Precautions When Driving
8
Drunken driving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since
alcohol affects all people differently, you
may have consumed too much alcohol to
drive safely even if the level of alcohol in
your blood is below the legal limit. The
safest thing you can do is never drink and
drive. However if you have no choice but
to drive, stop drinking and sober up
completely before getting behind the
wheel.
■ Drugs and Driving
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter-
ature that accompanies the medication to
determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
■ Driving When Tired or Sleepy
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you are
tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should
make periodic rest stops to refresh your-
self before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
■ Modification of Your Vehicle
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and
attentiveness. If you drive after tak-
ing them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your pas-
sengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a seri-
ous accident may increase.
WARNING
Do not remove the genuine
SUBARU audio system. Doing so
could cause the following func-
tions to be inoperable.
Combination meter display (color
TFT)
Rear view image and help lines
Vehicle settings
Clock
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its per-
formance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental reg-
ulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranties.
A4600BEscusenvhin02.fm 8 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３１分
Safety Precautions When Driving
9
Introduction
– CONTINUED –
■ Use of Cell Phones/Texting
and Driving
■
Driving Vehicles Equipped
with Audio System
■
Driving with Pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unre-
strained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be prop-
erly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a
pet with a special traveling harness which
can be secured to the rear seat with a
seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the
front passenger’s seat. For further infor-
mation, consult your veterinarian, local
animal protection society or pet shop.
■ Tire Pressures
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month and
before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. For detailed
information, refer to "Tires and Wheels"
P358.
■ Attaching Accessories
CAUTION
Do not talk on a cell phone or text
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and lead to
an accident. If you use a cell phone
to talk or text, first pull off the road
and park in a safe place. In some
States/Provinces, it may be lawful to
talk on a phone while driving, but
only if the phone is hands-free.
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also,
do not operate the controls of the
audio system while driving. The
loss of attention to driving could
lead to an accident. If you wish to
operate the controls of the audio
system, first take the vehicle off the
road and stop it in a safe location.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly
become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruc-
tion of the tires. The resulting
loss of vehicle control could
lead to an accident.
WARNING
Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection
stickers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
B. 9 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
General Information
10
General Information
■ California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless entry transmitter batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
■ Noise from under the Vehicle
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
noise is caused by the operation of the
fuel evaporation leakage checking
system and the operation is normal.
The noise will stop after approximately
15 minutes.
■ Vehicle Data Recording
The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated
computers that will record certain data,
such as:
Vehicle speed
Engine speed
Engine control information
Shift state information
Driving information, etc.
▼
Data usage
SUBARU may use the data recorded in
this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and
improve quality.
SUBARU will not disclose the recorded
data to a third party except:
With the consent of the vehicle owner
or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit
For research purposes where the data
is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
Do not connect any unauthorized
accessories or devices to the
data link connector (OBDII port).
This connector should be used
only with compatible diagnostic
devices for inspection and main-
tenance by an authorized service
technician using authorized
service tools. Connecting unau-
thorized devices, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device,
may adversely affect vehicle
systems, including safety
systems, or allow others to
access information stored in your
vehicle. The use of unauthorized
devices may also cause unex-
pected malfunctions, such as a
drained battery, or may damage
vehicle systems. The manufac-
turer’s warranty will not cover
any part that malfunctions, fails,
or is damaged due to the use of
an unauthorized device with the
data link connector.
B. 10 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
General Information
11
Introduction
■ Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how
a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
B. 11 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 12 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Illustrated Index
Illustrated Index
Exterior ..................................................................14
Interior....................................................................16
Instrument Panel...................................................19
Steering Wheel ......................................................20
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/
Switches ..............................................................21
Combination Meter................................................22
U.S. Spec. Models (Normal mode) ............................... 22
U.S. Spec. Models (TRACK mode) ............................... 23
Except U.S. Spec. Models (Normal mode)................... 24
Except U.S. Spec. Models (TRACK mode) .................. 25
Warning and Indicator Lights ..............................26
B. 13 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Exterior
14
Exterior
1
11
4 532
10 8 769
002012
1) Engine hood (page 343)
2) Turn signal lights (page 182, 373)
3) Lights (page 174, 373)
4) Wipers (page 184)
5) Outside mirrors (page 194)
6) Door locks (page 111)
7) Tire pressure (page 361)
8) Flat tires (page 303)
9) Tire chains (page 297)
10) Tie-down hooks (page 320)
11) Towing hook (page 320)
B. 14 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Exterior
15
Illustrated Index
1
7
2
6 5 4 3
002013
1) Rear window defogger (page 185)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 224)
3) Tie-down holes (page 320)
4) Lights (page 174, 373)
5) Turn signal lights (page 182, 373)
6) Towing hook (page 320)
7) Trunk lid (page 119)
B. 15 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Interior
16
Interior
21 2
4 3
002014
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 55)
2) Seatbelts (page 39)
3) Front seats (page 30)
4) Rear seats (page 37)
B. 16 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Interior
17
Illustrated Index
– CONTINUED –
1 2 4 653
910 8
7
002015
1) Cup holder and console tray (AT
models) (page 214)
2) Parking brake lever (page 256)
3) Shift lever (MT models)/Select lever (AT
models) (page 233, 237)
4) Center information display (page160)/
Audio system
*
5) Climate control (page 198)
6) Glove box (page 214)
7) Accessory power outlet (page 215)
8) Center console (page 214)
9) Cup holder and console tray (page 214)
10) USB power supply (page 216)
*: For details about how to use the audio
system, refer to the separate audio
Owner’s Manual.
B. 17 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Interior
18
1 1
3 2
002016
1) Map light switches (page 212)
2) Door interlock switch (page 212)
3) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For models with SUBARU STARLINK:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for SUBARU STARLINK.
B. 18 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Instrument Panel
19
Illustrated Index
Instrument Panel
1 2 3 4 5 76
12
10 9 8
11
002018
1) Power window switches (page 116)
2) Remote control mirror switch (page
194)
3) Illumination brightness control dial
(page 130)
4) Trunk lid opener button (page 121)
5) Combination meter (page 127)
6) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 195)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
127)
8) “TRACK” button (page 250)
9) Driving pattern selector switch (AT
models) (page 241)
10) Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF
switch (page 249)
11) Seat heater switches (page 35)
12) Hood release knob (page 343)
B. 19 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Steering Wheel
20
Steering Wheel
1 1
9
33
9
22
4568 7
002019
1) Audio control switches
*1
2) Control switches for combination meter
display (color TFT) (page 152)
3) Shift paddles (AT models) (page 239)
4) Following distance setting switch
*2
5) Talk switch for voice command
system
*1
6) Cruise control switches (page 260)
*2
7) SRS airbag (page 60)
8) Horn (page 195)
9) Hands-free phone switches
*1
*1: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate audio Owner’s
Manual.
*2: For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
B. 20 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
21
Illustrated Index
Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
1
2
3
4
65
7
8
9
002020
1) Windshield wiper (page 183)
2) Mist (page 184)
3) Windshield washer (page 185)
4) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 184)
5) Wiper control lever (page 184)
6) Light control switch (page 174)
7) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 174)
8) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 176)
9) Turn signal lever (page 182)
B. 21 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter
22
Combination Meter
■ U.S. Spec. Models (Normal mode)
1 2 3
789
4 5 6
002005
1) Combination meter display (color TFT)
(page 151)
2) Tachometer (page 127)
3) Speedometer (page 127)
4) Outside temperature (page 129)
5) Clock (page 172)
6) Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 129)
7) Fuel gauge (page 129)
8) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 149)
9) Trip meter and odometer (page 128)
B. 22 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter
23
Illustrated Index
– CONTINUED –
■ U.S. Spec. Models (TRACK mode)
1 2 3 4 5 6
789
002006
1) Combination meter display (color TFT)
(page 151)
2) Tachometer (page 127)
3) Speedometer (page 127)
4) Outside temperature (page 129)
5) Clock (page 172)
6) Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 129)
7) Fuel gauge (page 129)
8) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 149)
9) Trip meter and odometer (page 128)
B. 23 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter
24
■ Except U.S. Spec. Models (Normal mode)
1 2 3
789
4 5 6
002007
1) Combination meter display (color TFT)
(page 151)
2) Tachometer (page 127)
3) Speedometer (page 127)
4) Outside temperature (page 129)
5) Clock (page 172)
6) Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 129)
7) Fuel gauge (page 129)
8) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 149)
9) Trip meter and odometer (page 128)
B. 24 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter
25
Illustrated Index
■ Except U.S. Spec. Models (TRACK mode)
1 2 3 4 5 6
789
002008
1) Combination meter display (color TFT)
(page 151)
2) Tachometer (page 127)
3)
Speedometer (page 127)
4) Outside temperature (page 129)
5) Clock (page 172)
6) Engine coolant temperature gauge
(page 129)
7) Fuel gauge (page 129)
8) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 149)
9) Trip meter and odometer (page 128)
B. 25 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
26
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 131
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
131
Rear passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
131
SRS airbag system
warning light
135
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction
indicator light
136
Coolant temperature
low indicator light
(blue)/Coolant tem-
perature high warning
light (red)
136
Charge warning light 137
Oil pressure warning
light
137
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT models)
138
ABS warning light 140
Brake system warning
light
140
Door open indicator 141
Low fuel warning light 141
Power steering warn-
ing light
141
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) warning light/
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) operation indica-
tor light
142
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) OFF indicator
light
143
TRAC OFF indicator
light
142
Access key warning
indicator
143
Security indicator light 148
Turn signal indicator
lights
149
High beam indicator
light
150
High beam assist indi-
cator light (if equipped)
150
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
150
LED headlight warning
light
150
Mark Name Page
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indica-
tor light (if equipped)
150
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
(if equipped)
150
Hill start assist indica-
tor light
150
Headlight indicator light 150
Cruise control indica-
tor light (white/green)/
Cruise control warning
light (yellow) (models
without the EyeSight
system)
149
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light (if equipped)
138
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
light
135
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
light
135
BSD/RCTA warning
indicator (if equipped)
150
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
150
Snow mode indicator
light (if equipped)
148
Mark Name Page
Warning and Indicator Lights
B. 26 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
27
Illustrated Index
Sport mode indicator
light (if equipped)
148
TRACK mode indica-
tor light
250
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
151
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
151
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
151
Master warning light 151
Mark Name Page
B. 27 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 28 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1-1. Front Seats ............................................................30
Manual Seat.....................................................................33
Head Restraint Adjustment ...........................................34
1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) .....................................35
Front Seat Heater............................................................36
1-3. Rear Seats .............................................................37
Folding Down the Rear Seatback..................................37
1-4. Seatbelts ................................................................39
Seatbelt Safety Tips .......................................................39
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................40
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ....................................................40
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ..............................41
Fastening the Seatbelt ...................................................41
Seatbelt Maintenance.....................................................43
1-5. Seatbelt Pretensioners .........................................44
Front passenger’s seatbelt with Shoulder Belt
Pretensioner .................................................................45
System Monitors.............................................................45
System Servicing............................................................45
Precautions against Vehicle Modification....................46
1-6. Child Restraint Systems.......................................46
Safety precautions .........................................................46
Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems .....48
Where to Place a Child Restraint System ....................48
Choosing a Child Restraint System............................. 50
Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR
Seatbelt ........................................................................ 51
Installing a Booster Seat............................................... 54
Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of
Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ................... 55
Top Tether Anchorages ................................................ 58
1-7. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
Airbag)..................................................................60
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System.......................................................................... 60
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System for Accessories and Any Objects ................ 62
General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System and Children................................................... 64
Components................................................................... 67
SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System,
SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ................ 69
SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag................... 80
SRS Airbag System Monitors ....................................... 87
SRS Airbag System Servicing ...................................... 88
Precautions against Vehicle Modification................... 89
How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer
concerning Modifications for Persons with
Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced
Airbag System ............................................................. 90
B. 29 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Front Seats
30
1-1. Front Seats
WARNING
Never adjust the seat while
driving, as personal injury or loss
of vehicle control may occur.
Before adjusting the seat, ensure
nothing is blocking the adjusting
mechanism.
After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to ensure the seat
is securely locked. If it is not, it
may move suddenly or the
seatbelt may not operate prop-
erly.
Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking mechanism
and cause an accident.
Seatbelts provide maximum
restraint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. To
reduce the risk of sliding under
the seatbelt in a collision, the
front seatbacks should always be
used in the upright position while
the vehicle is running. If the front
seatbacks are not in the upright
position and a collision occurs,
the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and of the lap belt sliding up
over the abdomen will increase,
and both can result in serious
injury or death.
The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not sitting
back and upright when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer
serious injury. Because the SRS
airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control,
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
100082
B. 30 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Front Seats
31
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For that reason, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child
restraint systems) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint system or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
for the child’s age, height and
weight. Secure ALL types of child
systems in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and
precautions concerning child
restraint systems, refer to "Child
Restraint Systems" P46.
100807
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event
of a collision, always put the
seatback in the upright position
while the vehicle is in motion. Also,
do not place objects such as cush-
ions between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdo-
men will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
101778
B. 31 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Front Seats
32
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may inter-
fere with the proper operation of the
following systems and could result
in serious injury.
Occupant detection system
SRS side airbag
Front seat heater (if equipped)
102298
WARNING
Do not press your feet onto the
instrument panel. Doing so may
prevent the occupant detection
function of the SRS airbag system
from functioning correctly, and may
result in serious injury or death in
the event of an accident.
101704
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum
restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants and
seatbacks or seat cushions. If you
do so, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up
over the abdomen will increase, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
B. 32 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Front Seats
33
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
■ Manual Seat
▼ Forward and backward adjustment
1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release the
lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
▼
Reclining the seatback
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the
seatback to the desired position, and then
release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
pulling up the lever. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
▼
Seat cushion height adjustment
(driver’s seat)
1) Push the lever down to lower the seat.
2) Pull the lever up to raise the seat.
You can adjust the height of the seat by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
▼ Getting in and out of the rear seats
To get in and out of the rear seats, use the
reclining lever or seatback fold lever.
102662
102663
1
2
102664
B. 33 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Front Seats
34
Driver’s seat
1) Seatback fold lever
2) Reclining lever
Front passenger's seat
1) Seatback fold lever
2) Reclining lever
▽ Before getting in or out of the
rear seats
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt
guide.
▽ Getting in the rear seats
Lift the reclining lever or seatback fold
lever.
The seatback will fold forward.
Front passenger's seat only: The seat can
be slid forward and backward.
▽ Getting out of the rear seats
Lift the reclining lever or seatback fold
lever.
The seatback will fold forward.
Front passenger's seat only: The seat can
be slid forward and backward.
▽ After getting in or out of the rear
seats
Return the seatback to the upright position
until the seat locks.
Front passenger seat only: The seat will
lock in position at the point where the
seatback reaches the upright position.
■ Head Restraint Adjustment
Both the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints. Both head restraints are adjust-
able in the following ways.
1
2
102758
1
2
102665
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints backwards.
Doing so will prevent the head
restraints from functioning as
intended. Therefore, when the
head restraints are removed, all
head restraints must be rein-
stalled properly to protect vehicle
occupants.
The vehicle should not be oper-
ated until the head restraints are
installed in their proper positions.
B. 34 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seat Heater (If Equipped)
35
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▼ Head restraint height adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
NOTE
It is not possible to remove or install
the head restraint without reclining the
front seatback. Reclining the front
seatback and then remove or install
the head restraint.
1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped)
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
1
2
102668
102080
CAUTION
Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat with
sharp objects, such as pins or
needles.
People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons
concerned.
Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
B. 35 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seat Heater (If Equipped)
36
When using for a long period of
time, we recommend setting the heater
to the LOW position. Use the HIGH
position for only quick heating at the
start of the function usage.
■ Front Seat Heater
1) HIGH – Rapid heating
2) LOW – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the
“LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the tempera-
ture. Selecting the “HIGH” position will
cause the seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press
the opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
AB
102669
B. 36 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear Seats
37
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
1-3. Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seat-
back
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum
restraint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. Do not
place cushions or any other materi-
als between occupants and
seatbacks or seat cushions. By
doing so, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
101953
WARNING
When folding down the seatback,
check that there are no passen-
gers or objects on the rear seat.
Not doing so creates a risk of
injury or property damage.
Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the trunk. Doing so may result in
serious injury or death.
Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
steering maneuver or accelera-
tion.
When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake it
slightly to confirm that it is
securely in place. If it is not
securely fixed in place, it may
suddenly fold down in the event
of sudden braking, or objects
may move out from the trunk,
both could cause serious injury
or death.
WARNING
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the proper
seatbelt operation will be affected.
The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
102666
B. 37 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear Seats
38
▼ Folding down the rear seatback
Lock release button
Lock release strap
Unlock the seatback by performing either
of the following procedures and then fold
the seatback down.
Push the right and left lock release
buttons.
Pull the right and left lock release
straps.
▼
Return the rear seatback
Lock release button
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
To return the seatback to its original posi-
tion, raise the seatback until it locks into
place and ensure that the unlocking
marker on the lock release button is no
longer visible.
102667
102670
A
12
102671
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker is not visible.
Also, push the rear seatback and
then check that it is securely locked
in position by lightly pushing it
back and forth. If the seatback is
not securely fixed in place, the
seatback may suddenly fold down
in the event of sudden braking, or
objects may move out from the
trunk, which could cause serious
injury or death.
B. 38 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelts
39
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
1-4. Seatbelts
■ Seatbelt Safety Tips
102759
WARNING
All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and
attaching hardware worn by
occupants of a vehicle that has
been in a serious accident. Also,
be sure to replace seatbelt
assemblies that show signs of
severe fraying or having been
cut. The entire assembly should
be replaced even if damage is not
obvious.
Seat children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child restraint systems)
sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint system or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s height and weight. Secure
ALL types of child restraint
systems in the REAR seats at all
times.
B. 39 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelts
40
This vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
▼
Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suit-
able for this vehicle. Refer to "Child
Restraint Systems" P46.
▼
Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
▼
Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap
belt should be worn securely and as low
as possible over the hips, not over the
waist.
■ Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
■ Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor normally functions as
an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The ALR/ELR has an additional locking
mode, “Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode”, intended to secure a child
restraint system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
"Child Restraint Systems" P46.
100100
B. 40 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelts
41
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
"Installing Child Restraint Systems with
ALR/ELR Seatbelt" P51.
When the child restraint system is
removed, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
■ Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
Refer to "Seatbelt Warning Light and
Chime" P131.
■ Fastening the Seatbelt
WARNING
Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
Seatbelts provide maximum
restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not used
in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the
lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants and
seatbacks or seat cushions. If
you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
100101
B. 41 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelts
42
▼ Front seatbelt guide
To enable the seatbelt to be easily
extended, pass the seatbelt through the
guide. When getting in or out of the rear
seats, release the seatbelt from the guide.
▼ Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the
seatback to the upright position. Move the
seat as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips, not on the waist.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn an occu-
pant. Do not touch such hot parts
until they cool.
102672
100102
100103
B. 42 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelts
43
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▽ Unfastening the seatbelt
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
▼
Rear seatbelts
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips, not on the waist.
▽ Unfastening the seatbelt
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
■ Seatbelt Maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
102492
1
100102
100103
102492
1
B. 43 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelt Pretensioners
44
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
1-5. Seatbelt Pretensioners
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
pretensioner.
Driver’s seatbelt
Front passenger’s seatbelt
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to be activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal and
side collision and rollover accident.
NOTE
Seatbelt pretensioners are not
designed to activate in minor impacts
or in rear impacts.
Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing
seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
pretensioner does not retract or cannot
be pulled out due to a malfunction or
activation of the pretensioner, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION
Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
WARNING
To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their
seatbelts properly fastened.
Refer to "Seatbelts" P39.
Do not modify, remove or strike
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt
pretensioners or surrounding
area. This could result in acci-
dental activation of the seatbelt
pretensioners or could make the
system inoperative, possibly
resulting in serious injury. Seat-
belt pretensioners have no user-
serviceable parts. For required
servicing of seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt
pretensioners, consult your
SUBARU dealer.
When discarding seatbelt
retractor assemblies equipped
with seatbelt pretensioners or
scrapping the entire vehicle due
to collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
B. 44 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Seatbelt Pretensioners
45
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with seatbelt
pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer of
the contents in this section.
■ Front passenger’s seatbelt
with Shoulder Belt Preten-
sioner
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
Front impact sensor
Side impact sensor
Door impact sensor
Rollover sensor
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioner includes a tension reducing
device which limits the peak forces
exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in
the event of a collision. The adaptive force
limiter will select a reducing load to suit the
body size of the occupant as detected by
the occupant detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can
not be pulled out and retracted and there-
fore must be replaced.
■ System Monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion. The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the SRS airbag
system. Therefore, if any malfunction
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS
airbag system warning light will illuminate.
For details, refer to "SRS Airbag System
Monitors" P87.
■ System Servicing
100121
WARNING
When discarding a seatbelt
retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury. Do not use elec-
trical test equipment on any
circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner,
consult your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to "Compo-
nents" P67.
B. 45 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
46
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
■ Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
1-6. Child Restraint Systems
■ Safety precautions
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible
with your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in "Installation of
Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower
and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)" P55).
If you need service or repair in
those areas or near the front
seatbelt retractors, have the work
performed by your authorized
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory
parts to the front end.
Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
center pillar or specified for indi-
vidual vehicle models in this
Owner’s Manual.
101656
B. 46 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
47
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
Children could be endangered in an acci-
dent if their child restraint systems are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Lock release button
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
A
12
102671
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior
temperatures may cause heat
stroke and dehydration that
result in serious injury or death.
100125
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle. Additionally,
holding a child in your lap or arms
in the front seat exposes that child
to another serious danger. Since
the SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force, the child
could be injured or even killed.
100126
B. 47 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
48
■ Safety Tips for Installing
Child Restraint Systems
■
Where to Place a Child
Restraint System
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING
Children should be properly
restrained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up
or kneeling on or in front of the
front seat are exposed another seri-
ous danger. Since the SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed
and force, the child could be injured
or even killed.
WARNING
Do not use a seatbelt extender. If
a seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint system,
the seatbelt will not securely hold
the child restraint system. Use of
a seatbelt extender could cause
death or serious injury to children
or other passengers in sudden
braking, swerving, or accidents.
Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
Child restraint systems and
seatbelts can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check the child
restraint system before you place
a child in it.
Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint
systems can be thrown around
inside of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be
increased.
WARNING
Several types of child restraint
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the
occupant of the neighboring seat
cannot correctly fasten the
seatbelt, that person must move
to a different seat. If the seatbelt
cannot be correctly fastened,
there is the risk of serious injury
or death in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
B. 48 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
49
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equip-
ment is provided for installing a child
restraint system.
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
seatbelts
Lower anchorages (bars)
Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly due
to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
If the child restraint system
cannot be correctly installed
because it contacts the driver’s
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it
cannot be installed in a different
seat (other than the driver’s seat),
adjust the front seat so that
contact does not occur.
102673
WARNING
Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Seat children in the
rear seat properly restrained at all
times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint systems
in the REAR seats at all times. You
should choose a restraint system
which is appropriate for the child’s
age, height and weight. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in
the front seating positions.
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
101999
B. 49 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
50
■ Choosing a Child Restraint
System
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all appli-
cable requirements of Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards for the United
States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards for Canada. It can be identified
by looking for the label on the child
restraint system or the manufacture’s
statement of compliance in the document
attached to the system. Also it is important
for you to make sure that the child restraint
system is compatible with the vehicle in
which it will be used.
NOTE
Some sizes of child restraint systems
may not fit the vehicle seat. Before
purchasing a child restraint system,
check whether it fits on the vehicle
seat.
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A
PASSENGER’S SRS AIRBAG,
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS
AIRBAG.
Do not allow children to lean their
heads or any other parts of their
bodies against the door or the
area of the seat, front and rear
pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even if children
are seated in the child restraint
system. It will be dangerous if the
SRS side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags inflate. The impact could
cause death or serious injury to
the child.
To secure the child restraint
system, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided
by the child restraint system
manufacturer. Not doing so could
result in death or serious injury to
children in a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
100502
B. 50 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
51
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
■ Installing Child Restraint
Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-
belt
▼ Installing a rearward facing child
restraint system
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into
place.
Check that the red colored
unlocking marker on the lock release
button is not visible. For details, refer
to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback"
P37.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode
is recommended by the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with the child
restraint system, perform the following
procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be
increased.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS
AIRBAG.
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
100503
101511
B. 51 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
52
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and side to side to check
that it is firmly secured in the center of the
seat. Sometimes a child restraint system
can be more firmly secured by pushing it
down into the seat cushion and then tight-
ening the seatbelt.
8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the ELR
mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore
the ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
▼
Installing a forward facing child
restraint system
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into
place.
Check that the red colored
unlocking marker on the lock release
button is not visible. For details, refer
to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback"
P37.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
100610
100506
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS
AIRBAG.
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
B. 52 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
53
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
7. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt.
8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
9. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
"Top Tether Anchorages" P58.
10. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
101933
101934
101935
102675
101936
B. 53 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
54
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the ELR
mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore
the ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
■ Installing a Booster Seat
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
101943
WARNING
Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
101944
Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or
reducing injury.
Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will
increase the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during
sudden braking or in a collision.
B. 54 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
55
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
■ Installation of Child Restraint
Systems by Use of Lower
and Tether Anchorages
(LATCH)
▼ Lower and tether anchorages
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seats detects if any of the seats
are occupied by a passenger. Install-
ing a child restraint system in the rear
seating area, using the LATCH
anchors, may result in the activation of
the passenger seatbelt warning light
and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt
prior to installing the child restraint
system will avoid activating the pas-
senger seatbelt warning light and
chime. For details, refer to "Rear pas-
senger’s seats" P133
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and two upper anchor-
ages (tether anchorages) for accommo-
dating such child restraint systems.
WARNING
Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
102674
When installing a child restraint
system using LATCH anchors
with the rear seatbelt fastened,
ensure that the rear seatbelt does
not become caught in the child
restraint system or the lower
LATCH anchorages.
101210
B. 55 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
56
▽ Lower anchorages
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system. For
each seating position, two lower anchor-
ages are provided. Each lower anchorage
is located where the seat cushion meets
the seatback.
▽ Tether anchorages
1) For right seat
2) For left seat
The tether anchorages (upper anchor-
ages) are provided at the locations shown
in the above illustration. For details, refer
to "Top Tether Anchorages" P58.
▽ To install a child restraint
system using lower and tether
anchorages
1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into
place.
Check that the red colored
unlocking marker on the lock release
button is not visible. For details, refer
to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback"
P37.
102676
1 2
102677
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
B. 56 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
57
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottoms
of the rear seatback. These marks indi-
cate the positions of the lower anchorages
(bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Peel off the anchorage cover completely
from the selected side of the rear
seatback to expose the anchorages (bars)
to be used for installation of the child
restraint system.
If it is hard to install the child restraint
system because the anchorage cover
returns to the original position, press the
anchorage cover to the seat cushion until
it is flat.
3. While following the instructions
supplied by the child restraint system
manufacturer, connect the lower hooks
onto the lower anchorages located at “ ”
marks on the bottom of the rear seatback.
When the hooks are connected, make
sure the adjacent seatbelts are not
caught.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be
increased.
102678 102760 102679
B. 57 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
58
4. If your child restraint system is a flex-
ible attachment type (which uses tether
belts), push the child restraint system into
the seat cushion and pull both left and
right lower tether belts up to secure the
child restraint system by taking up the
slack in the belt.
5. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located on the
rear shelf and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to "Top
Tether Anchorages" P58.
6. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
7. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
■ Top Tether Anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with two top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing a
child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
102680 102681
B. 58 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Child Restraint Systems
59
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
▼ Tether anchorage location
1) For right seat
2) For left seat
Two tether anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf. Remove the cover flap to
use each anchorage.
▼ To hook the top tether
1. Remove the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
2. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
3. Tighten the top tether securely.
Contact your SUBARU dealer if you have
any questions regarding the installation of
a child restraint system.
After removing a child restraint system,
make sure to install the top tether cover to
its original position.
1 2
102677
102682
102675
B. 59 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
60
1-7. SRS Airbag (Supple-
mental Restraint System
Airbag)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
name is used because the airbag system
supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
This vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system which consists of
seven airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
Curtain airbags (for driver, front
passenger and rear passengers)
Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt Preten-
sioners" P44.
■ General Precautions
regarding SRS Airbag
System
WARNING
To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. It does
not eliminate the need to fasten
seatbelts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to "Seatbelts" P39.
The SRS side airbags and SRS
curtain airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the
seatbelt. They do not eliminate
the need to fasten seatbelts. It is
also important to wear a seatbelt
to help avoid injuries that can
result when an occupant is not
seated in a proper upright posi-
tion.
100155
B. 60 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
61
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
The SRS airbags deploy with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are not seated in proper
upright position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer serious
injury. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit
upright and back in the seat as far
from the steering wheel as practical
while still maintaining full vehicle
control, and the front passenger
should move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
102008
WARNING
Do not sit or lean close to either
door. The SRS side airbags are
stored in both front seat
seatbacks next to the door, and
they provide protection by
deploying rapidly in the event of a
side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS side airbag
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean close to the door on
either side. Do not put body parts
out of the window. The SRS
curtain airbags on both sides of
the cabin are stored in the roof
side (between the front pillar and
a point behind the rear quarter
glass), and they provide protec-
tion by deploying rapidly in the
event of a side impact, rollover or
an offset frontal collision.
However, the force of its deploy-
ment can injure an occupant
whose body is too close to an
SRS airbag.
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear
seatbelts to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in their proper position.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury, such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms,
because of the SRS airbag
deployment force.
B. 61 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
62
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
notify the buyer of the applicable
section in this Owner’s Manual.
If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to "If Your Vehicle Is Involved in
an Accident" P328.
■ General Precautions
regarding SRS Airbag
System for Accessories and
Any Objects
WARNING
Keep arms away from either door
or its internal trim. They could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
102009
CAUTION
When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause
breathing problems for people
with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing prob-
lems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
102683
102218
B. 62 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
63
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Do not put any objects (including
straps or cord) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
- These objects could be entan-
gled with the steering wheel,
preventing the SRS frontal
airbag, etc. from operating
properly.
- If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, these objects could
be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
deploys, those objects could
interfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could become projectiles
that could seriously injure vehicle
occupants.
101940
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
100168
B. 63 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
64
■ General Precautions
regarding SRS Airbag
System and Children
Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to a
front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side
window, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
accessory in such a location
could be propelled through the
cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
101973
WARNING
Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over the front
seatback and do not attach labels
or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent
proper deployment of the SRS
side airbag, reducing protection
available to the front seat’s occu-
pant.
Do not install a seat cover unless
it is a genuine SUBARU seat
cover exclusively designed for
use with the SRS airbag. Even
when using a genuine SUBARU
seat cover, the SRS side airbag
system may not function
normally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
100082
B. 64 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
65
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child restraint systems) sit
in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
systems (including forward facing
child restraint system) in the REAR
seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to "Child Restraint Sys-
tems" P46.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
101999
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
100126
B. 65 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
66
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
100125
WARNING
Never allow a child to do the
following.
- Kneel on any passenger’s
seat facing the side window
100166
100167
- Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
- Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag,
children should be placed in the
rear seat anyway and should be
properly restrained at all times.
B. 66 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
67
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
■ Components
1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS knee airbag
1
5
2 3 4
3
102684
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the
center portion of the steering wheel
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the right side of dashboard
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the
right corner of the dashboard.
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback
An “SRS AIRBAG” marks are located on
the door side of each front seat cushion.
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
B. 67 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
68
1
20
2 3 4 6 14975 10 11 13128 15
212223 17 1619 18
102764
1) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
2) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
3) SRS airbag system warning light
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
5) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor)
6) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
7) Frontal airbag module (front
passenger’s side)
8) Seatbelt buckle switch (front
passenger’s side)
9) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
10) Side impact sensor (door right-hand
side)
11) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
14) Airbag wiring
15) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
16) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
17) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
18) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
20) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
21) Side impact sensor (door left-hand side)
22) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
23) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
B. 68 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
69
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
■ SUBARU Advanced Frontal
Airbag System, SRS Side
Airbag and SRS Curtain
Airbag
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that
complies with the new advanced frontal
airbag requirements in the amended
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the
deployment force of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment as
well as whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
This vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to "Components" P67.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
SRS frontal airbag for driver
SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
SRS curtain airbag*
SRS knee airbag for driver
*: When an offset frontal collision that is
severe enough to deploy the front airbag
occurs.
These components supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
In a moderate to severe side impact colli-
sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted
side of the vehicle deploys between the
occupant and the door panel and supple-
ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact
to the occupant’s chest and waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact colli-
sion, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt
pretensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
▼ Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
102697
B. 69 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
70
SRS airbag system warning light
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
▼
Front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and
posture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection
system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be
deployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt
pretensioner. For details about the
seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt
Pretensioners" P44.
102698
102171
1
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such
as by kicking.
Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front
seatback and seat cushion.
Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front
passenger’s seat.
B. 70 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
71
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag system warning light
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU
dealer immediately if the SRS airbag
system warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
▼
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
Refer to "Front Passenger’s Frontal
Airbag ON and OFF Indicators" P135.
Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint
removed.
Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle
engaged when you leave your
vehicle.
Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphol-
stery.
Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to "Manual Seat" P33
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
102698
306789
B. 71 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
72
▼ Occupant detection system
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and
posture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection
system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be
deployed or not.
SRS airbag system warning light
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the system to determine deployment.
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
dry naturally and then check the SRS
airbag system warning light.
102171
1
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat
or subject it to severe impact. Oth-
erwise, the SRS airbag system
warning light may illuminate to indi-
cate a malfunction of the front pas-
senger occupant detection system.
In this case, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
tion of the occupant detection
system. If either of the following sit-
uations occurs when using an elec-
tronic device in the vehicle, at first
try to relocate that device to avoid it
creating any interference.
The SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
The front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators
operate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
102698
B. 72 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
73
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators do not work properly
even when the front passenger’s seat is
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the occupant
detection system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
may adversely affect the ability of the
system to determine deployment. This
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators from
working properly. Check that the indica-
tors work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the
ON indicator illuminates, the front
passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy
during a collision. Remove luggage and
electronic devices from the front
passenger’s seat.
▼
Conditions in which front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is
not activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
The seat is empty.
The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
or a child is restrained in it. (See
WARNING that follows.)
The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
306789 306789
B. 73 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
74
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
If you think that the Front passenger's
frontal airbag ON/OFF indicator is incor-
rect, take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the occupant.
Ensure that the backward-forward
position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions
described above, immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
Even if the system has passed the dealer
inspection, it is recommended that on
subsequent trips the small adult always
take the rear seat.
NOTE
When a small adult is seated in the
front passenger’s seat, the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system may or
may not activate the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag depending on the
occupant’s seating posture. If the OFF
indicator remains illuminated while the
ON indicator turns off when a small
adult is seated in the front passenger's
seat, see next section “Conditions in
which front passenger's SRS frontal
airbag is activated.”
▼ Conditions in which front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN
IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS
FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTI-
VATED. Be sure to install it in the
REAR seat in a correct manner.
Also, it is strongly recommended
that any forward facing child seat or
booster seat be installed in the
REAR seat, and that even children
who have outgrown a child restraint
system be also seated in the REAR
seat. This is because children sit-
ting in the front passenger’s seat
may be killed or severely injured
should the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats
are the safest place for children.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions
as it increase the load on the front
passenger's seat and not work
properly.
Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the
seatback.
Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger's
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
306789
A4600BEscusenvhch01.fm 74 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
75
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
tions are met regarding the front
passenger’s seat.
When the seat is occupied by an adult.
When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
▽ If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and
the ON indicator turns off even
when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied by an adult
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat
to the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, extra seat
cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or
massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON
indicator should illuminate while the OFF
indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
CAUTION
When the front passenger's seat is
occupied by an adult, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to do so may lessen the load
on the front passenger's seat, deac-
tivating the front passenger's SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that
the seat is occupied by an adult.
This may result in personal injury.
Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to lift the front passenger's
seat cushion using his/her feet.
Do not place any article under the
front passenger's seat, or
squeeze any article from behind
and under the seat.
Do not squeeze any article
between the front passenger's
seat and side trim/pillar, door or
center console box. This may lift
the seat cushion.
306789
B. 75 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
76
▼ Operation
101586
A
B
1
2
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start
to deflate immediately so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the acti-
vation or deactivation condition of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item(s)
or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a colli-
sion, but this does not mean failure of the
system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front
passenger’s modules) instructing the
module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal
airbag(s).
B. 76 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
77
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
The front impact sensors
The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are trig-
gered either sequentially or simultane-
ously, depending on the severity of
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag and depending on the
severity of impact and the characteristic of
item(s) or person on the seat in the case
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag.
▼
After deployment
After deployment, the SRS airbag immedi-
ately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
▼
Example of the type of accident
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are
designed as follows.
To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
designed as follows.
To deploy in most lesser frontal
impacts
*1
To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents
*2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would
not protect the occupant in those situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the
passenger compartment during a colli-
sion. That level differs from one type of
collision to another, and it may have no
bearing on the visible damage done to the
vehicle itself.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
B. 77 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
78
▽ Example of accident in which
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will most likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick
concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to
19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
▽ Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
101394
101313
B. 78 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
79
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
2
101418
1
3
4
5
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) may not deploy depending on
the level of accident forces involved.
B. 79 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
80
▽ Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s) are not
designed to deploy in most
cases
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed
frontal collision
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
■ SRS Side Airbag and SRS
Curtain Airbag
▼ SRS side airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe side impact colli-
sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted
side of the vehicle deploys between the
occupant and the door panel and supple-
ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact
on the occupant’s chest and waist. The
SRS side airbag operates only for front
seat occupants.
101315
1
2
101395
100281
B. 80 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
81
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▼ SRS curtain airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
located at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact colli-
sion, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and
supplement the seatbelt by reducing the
impact to the occupant’s head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle
deploy between the occupant and the side
window and supplement the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
▼
Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The following airbags deploy inde-
pendently of each other since each has its
own impact sensor.
Driver’s SRS side airbag
Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys inde-
pendently of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags in the
steering wheel and instrument panel.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to "Components"
P67.
▼
After deployment
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
▼
Example of the type of accident
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so
can cause burns because the com-
ponents can be very hot as a result
of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-
tem (from the front pillar to the part
of the roof side over the rear seat).
Doing so can cause burns because
the components can be very hot as
a result of deployment.
B. 81 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
82
To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side
impact collision
To function on a one-time-only basis.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
In most lesser side impact
In most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not
protect the occupant in those situations)
The SRS curtain airbags are also
designed to deploy when the vehicle is in
an extremely inclined state such as during
a rollover. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
▽ Example of the type of accident
in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy.
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
101369
1
B. 82 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
83
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy.
101789
3
12
4
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
B. 83 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
84
▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will
deploy.
1
3
2
102055
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
B. 84 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
85
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy.
1
3
2
4
5
101319
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
B. 85 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
86
▽ Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy.
1
3
2
4
101480
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
B. 86 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
87
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
▽ Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal colli-
sion with another vehicle (moving or
stationary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those illus-
trated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
■ SRS Airbag System Monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including seatbelt pretensioners) with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
Front impact sensor
1
3
2
102056
B
A
12
101410
102698
B. 87 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
88
- Right-hand side
- Left-hand side
Airbag control module (including
impact sensor and rollover sensor)
Frontal airbag module
- Driver’s side
- Front passenger’s side
Knee airbag module
- Driver’s side
Side impact sensor
- Center pillar left-hand side
- Center pillar right-hand side
- Forward of rear wheel house left-
hand side
- Forward of rear wheel house right-
hand side
- Door left-hand side
- Door right-hand side
Side airbag module
- Driver’s side
- Front passenger’s side
Curtain airbag module
- Right-hand side
- Left-hand side
Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter
- Driver’s side
- Front passenger’s side
Seatbelt buckle switch
- Front passenger’s side
Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
All related wiring
■ SRS Airbag System
Servicing
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and consult a SUBARU
dealer. Unless a technician checks
and repairs the system as needed,
the seatbelt pretensioners and/or
the SRS airbag will not operate
properly in the event of a collision,
which may result in injury.
Flashing or flickering of the
warning light
No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
Continuous illumination of the
warning light
Illumination of the warning light
while driving
WARNING
When discarding an airbag
module or scrapping the entire
vehicle damaged by a collision,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in
areas indicated in the following list,
have the work performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer. The
SRS airbag control module, impact
sensors and airbag modules are
stored in these areas.
B. 88 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
89
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
– CONTINUED –
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer. When the
components of the SRS airbag system
are replaced, use only genuine
SUBARU parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
The center pillar, door, rear wheel
house or rear sub frame, or an area
near these parts, was involved in an
accident in which the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.
The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
■ Precautions against Vehicle
Modification
Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
Each front seat and nearby area
Inside each center pillar
Inside each door
In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifica-
tions.
- Installation of custom steering
wheels
- Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
- Installation of custom seats
- Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
- Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
- Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other
accessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
B. 89 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
90
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
■ How to Contact the Vehicle
Manufacturer concerning
Modifications for Persons
with Disabilities That May
Affect the Advanced Airbag
System
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instru-
ment panel, combination meter, steering
wheel, steering column, tire, suspension
or floor panel can affect the operation of
the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If
you have any questions, you may contact
the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Advocacy Department
One Subaru Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Camden, NJ 08101-9877
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850-A Pukoloa St.,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338
<Guam>
- Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS
airbag system components
and/or wiring is not advisable.
This could interfere with
proper operation of the SRS
airbag system.
- Modifications on or inside the
door panels for the purpose of
a speaker replacement or
sound insulation
The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors will create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inopera-
tive or unintended airbag deploy-
ment.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory
parts to the front end.
Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
center pillar or specified for indi-
vidual vehicle models in this
Owner’s Manual.
Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
B. 90 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
91
Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
biles
491 East Marine Corps Drive,
Dededo, Guam 96929
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,
Puerto Rico
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
B. 91 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 92 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keys and Doors
2
Keys and Doors
2-1. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start
System .................................................................94
Safety Precautions .........................................................94
Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access”
Entry Function..............................................................97
Unlock Using PIN Code Access..................................100
Power Saving Function................................................102
Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob...............103
Disabling Keyless Access Function ...........................103
Selecting Audible Signal Operation (If Equipped).....105
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ...........106
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator ....................106
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly.......................................................................106
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob........................106
Replacing Access Key Fob..........................................106
Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button
Start System ...............................................................106
2-2. Immobilizer ..........................................................108
Security Indicator Light ...............................................108
Key Replacement..........................................................108
Certification for Immobilizer System ..........................108
2-3. Remote Keyless Entry System ..........................109
Locking the Doors........................................................110
Unlocking the Doors ....................................................110
Opening the Trunk Lid .................................................110
Setting Audible Signal Operation (If Equipped)........ 110
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation........... 110
Vehicle Finder Function.............................................. 110
Sounding a Panic Alarm ............................................. 110
Replacing the Battery.................................................. 111
Replacing Lost Transmitters ...................................... 111
2-4. Door Locks ..........................................................111
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside ................. 111
Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .................... 112
Key Lock-In Prevention Function............................... 113
Battery Drainage Prevention Function ...................... 113
2-5. Alarm System ......................................................114
Alarm System Operation............................................. 114
Arming the System ...................................................... 114
Disarming the System................................................. 115
Alarm System Setting.................................................. 115
If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm
System........................................................................ 116
2-6. Windows ..............................................................116
Power Window Operation ........................................... 117
Initialization of Power Window ................................... 118
2-7. Trunk Lid..............................................................119
To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from Outside....... 120
To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside ............................ 121
Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle............................. 121
B. 93 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
94
2-1. Keyless Access with
Push-Button Start System
The following access key fobs are
provided with the vehicle.
1) Access key fob
2) Key number plate
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key fob.
Locking and unlocking of the doors,
fuel filler lid
Opening the trunk
Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to "Starting and
Stopping Engine" P229.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system. For detailed information, refer to
"Alarm System" P114.
NOTE
Locking and unlocking by the
remote keyless entry system can also
be controlled with the buttons on the
access key fob. For detailed informa-
tion, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry
System" P109.
Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and addi-
tional registration of access key fobs.
For details, refer to "Key Replacement"
P108.
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
The emergency key is used for locking
and unlocking the driver’s door.
■ Safety Precautions
203629
11 2
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
1
2
202500
B. 94 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
95
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
1) Antenna
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and
implanted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical
equipment other than an implanted
pacemaker or an implanted
defibrillator, before using the key-
less access with push-button start
system, refer to “Radio waves used
for the keyless access with push-
button start system” mentioned
later, and contact the electronic
medical equipment manufacturer
for more information. The radio
waves from the transmitting anten-
nas on the vehicle could adversely
affect the operation of the elec-
tronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”
The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following frequency*
in addition to the radio waves
used for the remote keyless entry
system. The radio waves are peri-
odically output from the antennas
installed on the vehicle as shown
in the following illustrations.
*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1
1
11
204126
B. 95 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
96
NOTE
The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to "Disabling Keyless
Access Function" P103.
For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless
access function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to "Access Key
Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly" P325.
The keyless access with push-
button start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
fob and environmental conditions may
interfere with the communication
between the access key fob and the
vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or
unlock the doors or start the engine.
CAUTION
Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key fob may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch
may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
The access key fob contains elec-
tronic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
- It is recommended to have the
access key fob battery
replaced at an authorized
SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage.
- Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
- Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key fob.
- Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or
anywhere that may become
hot, such as on the dash-
board. It may damage the
battery or cause circuit
malfunctions.
- Do not wash the access key
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
- Do not leave the access key
fob in humid or dusty loca-
tions. Doing so may cause
malfunctions.
- Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
- Do not leave the access key
fob near a personal computer
or home electrical appliance.
- Do not leave the access key
fob near a battery charger or
any electrical accessories.
- Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects
to the windows.
- Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts.
If the access key fob is dropped,
the integrated emergency key
inside may become loose. Be
careful not to lose the emergency
key.
When traveling in an airplane, do
not press the button of the access
key fob. If any button of the
access key fob is pressed, radio
waves are emitted and may affect
the operation of the airplane. In a
bag, take measures to prevent the
buttons from being pressed acci-
dentally.
B. 96 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
97
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
- When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans-
mitted, such as a broadcast station
and power transmission lines.
- When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as an
access key fob or a remote trans-
mitter key of another vehicle.
- When carrying the access key
fob of your vehicle together with the
access key fob or the remote trans-
mitter of another vehicle.
- When the access key fob is
placed near wireless communica-
tion equipment such as a cell phone.
- When the access key fob is
placed near a metallic object.
- When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key fob.
- When carrying the access key
fob with an electronic appliance
such as a laptop computer.
- When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged.
The access key fob is always
communicating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating condi-
tions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If
the battery becomes fully discharged,
replace it with a new one.
If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining
access key fobs be reregistered. For
reregistration of an access key fob,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
For a spare access key fob, contact
a SUBARU dealer.
Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle.
Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle,
such as the door pocket, dashboard or
inside the corner of the trunk. Vibra-
tions may damage the access key fob
or turn on the switch, possibly
resulting in a lockout.
After the vehicle battery is
discharged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be
required to start the engine. In this
case, perform the following procedure
to initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to "Switching Power
Status"
P125.
(2) Open and close the driver’s door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10
seconds.
When the steering is locked, the initial-
ization is completed.
Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places.
- On the instrument panel
- On the floor
- Inside the glove box
- Inside the door trim pocket
- On the rear seat
- On the rear shelf
- Inside the trunk
If you do, the following situations
may occur.
- The access key fob is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
- A false warning issues although
no malfunction actually occurs.
- No warning issues even when a
malfunction occurs.
■ Locking and Unlocking with
“Keyless Access” Entry
Function
When the access key fob is carried within
the operating range, the doors, the fuel
filler lid can be locked/unlocked just by
touching the door handle.
NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/
unlocked with the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
"Remote Keyless Entry System"
P109.
B. 97 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
98
▼ Operating ranges
1) Antenna
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to
32 in (40 to 80 cm))
1) LED indicator
When the access key fob is within either of
the operating ranges of the doors, the
LED indicator on the access key fob
flashes. When the keyless access func-
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does
not flash unless a button on the access
key fob is pressed.
NOTE
If the access key fob is placed too
close to the vehicle body, the keyless
access functions may not operate
properly. If it does not operate prop-
erly, repeat the operation from farther
away.
If the access key fob is placed near
the ground or in an elevated location
from the ground, even if it is in the indi-
cated operating range, the keyless
access function may not operate prop-
erly.
When the access key fob is within
the operating range, it is possible for
anyone, even someone who is not
carrying the access key fob, to operate
the keyless access function. Note that
the keyless access function can be
operated only by the door handle, door
lock sensor or trunk opener button in
the operating range in which the
access key fob is detected.
It is not possible to lock the doors,
trunk lid and fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
However, depending on the status of
the access key fob and the environ-
mental conditions, the access key fob
may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking the vehicle, make sure
that you have the access key fob.
When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating it
in a location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the oper-
ating ranges may be reduced, or the
keyless access function may not
operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in "Locking and Unlocking"
P326.
The doors may lock or unlock when
the car is being washed or exposed to
a significant amount of water that
touches the door handle while the key
fob is still in the operating range.
▼
How to lock and unlock
It is possible to perform the following oper-
ations when you are carrying the access
key fob.
Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel
filler lid
2
2
1
2
1
1
204127
202501
1
B. 98 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
99
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
Unlock the trunk lid
NOTE
It is not possible to lock the doors
and fuel filler lid using the keyless
access function when the push-button
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position. Refer to "Switching Power
Status" P125.
If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
If the door lock sensor is touched
four times or more repeatedly, the
system will ignore the sensor opera-
tion.
When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not
complete.
If any of the doors are not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds 5
seconds to alert you that the doors are
not properly closed.
It is possible to lock a closed door
even if the other door is open. After
performing the locking procedure,
close the opened door to lock it.
Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors using the keyless access func-
tion, it is not possible to unlock doors
using the keyless access function.
When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details. The setting
of the hazard warning flasher operation
can be changed by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to "Car settings" P165.
▽ Locking with the door lock
sensor
1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
and touch the door lock sensor on the
door handle. All doors including the fuel
filler lid will be locked. Also, an electronic
chirp will sound once and the hazard
warning flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors, if you touch the
door lock sensor twice more to
attempt the lock operation without first
unlocking the doors, nothing will hap-
pen, even if the door lock sensor is
touched. In this case, perform the
unlocking operation once first. You
can then touch the door lock sensor to
lock the doors.
▽ Unlocking
Carry the access key fob, and touch the
sensor behind the door handle.
1
204128
204129
B. 99 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
100
When the driver’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door and the fuel
filler lid will be unlocked.
When the passenger’s door handle is
gripped, all doors (including the trunk lid)
and the fuel filler lid will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
▽ Opening trunk
1) Trunk opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
trunk opener button. The trunk will open.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the key
fob.
The trunk lock/unlock setting is on.
All doors are unlocked.
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
▼
Do
or unlock selection function
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors
that were set and the fuel filler lid can be
unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
The setting can be changed by oper-
ating the center information display.
For details, refer to "Car settings" P165.
The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
■ Unlock Using PIN Code
Access
1) Trunk opener button
While all doors are locked, you can unlock
the doors without a key by operating the
trunk opener button.
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
1
204166
1
204130
B. 100 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
101
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
▼ Registration for a PIN code
Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. ―
2 Close all doors (including trunk). ―
3
Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob, then press and hold the
trunk opener button until a chirp sounds intermittently.
―
4
Press the “ ” button on the access key fob.
Within 30 seconds
Input the PIN code using the trunk opener button within 30 seconds after the
chirp sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following pro-
cedure.
Within 30 seconds
5
(1) Press the button three times.
(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6
Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts
sounding intermittently.
―
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered. ―
B. 101 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
102
NOTE
Press the trunk opener button ten
times to enter “0”.
Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “ ”
or “ ” button on the access key fob.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in “Registration for a PIN
code”.
To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register “00000” to “99999”
or “12345” as a PIN code.
Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so will increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
When you try to register “22222”,
the registered PIN code will be deleted.
You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
Code Access until a new code is regis-
tered.
After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key
fob.
Reregister the PIN code in the
following case.
- When you forget the PIN code
- When you want to change the
PIN code
▼
Unlocking
Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5
described in “Registration”.
NOTE
You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
- When the access key fob is
within the operating ranges
- When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
If you make an operation error
during the unlocking procedure, start
over with the unlocking procedure
after waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN
codes are entered five times continu-
ously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock
the doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
■ Power Saving Function
To protect the access key fob battery and
the vehicle battery, the keyless access
function will be disabled as follows.
When the keyless access function and
the remote keyless entry system have not
been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-
tion switch has been turned off,
communication between the antennas
and the access key fob will be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock sensor)
on the passenger’s door will be
disabled.
When the access key fob has been left
in the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked, the
keyless access function will be disabled.
▼
Recovery from power saving mode
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the
passenger’s door are not disabled) or
pressing the trunk opener button on the
trunk lid
Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system
B. 102 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
103
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
Open a door and then close it
Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position
■ Power Saving Function of
Access Key Fob
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access key
fob.
1. Press the “ ” button twice while
holding the “ ” button.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is complete.
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available.
To cancel the power save mode, press
one of the buttons on the access key fob.
■ Disabling Keyless Access
Function
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in "Starting Engine"
P326.
▼
Disabling functions
▽ By operating the access key fob
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the access key fob, register a
PIN code for PIN Code Access. For
details about registering a PIN code, refer
to "Unlock Using PIN Code Access"
P100.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
202501
1
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure "By operating
the driver’s door" P104 to disable
the keyless access function. If you
perform the procedure "By operat-
ing the access key fob" P103, the
operation of an implanted pace-
maker or implanted defibrillator
may be affected by the radio waves
from the transmitter antenna.
203610
B. 103 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
104
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and
“ ” button on the access key fob simul-
taneously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the func-
tion will be disabled.
▽ By operating the driver’s door
To disable the keyless access function by
operating the driver’s door, perform the
following procedures.
202646
204132
B. 104 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
105
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not
pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.
Steps Operation Time Status
1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. ― Close
2
Push “ ” on the power door locking
switch.
― Close
3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. CloseOpen
4
Push “ ” on the power door locking switch
twice.
Within 5 sec. Open
5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.
OpenCloseOpen
CloseOpen
6
Push “ ” on the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Within 10 sec. Open
7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. OpenCloseOpen
8 Close the door. Within 5 sec. OpenClose
▼ Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp sound
will be heard, and the functions are
enabled.
NOTE
The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when
disabling by operating the driver’s
door, the function will not be enabled
even if you operate the access key
fob).
Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access func-
tion was disabled.
- When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: a chirp will not be
heard
- When disabling by operating the
access key fob: a chirp will be heard
■ Selecting Audible Signal
Operation (If Equipped)
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
B. 105 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
106
center information display. For details,
refer to "Car settings" P165.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
■ Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to "Car
settings" P165. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
■ Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations
and help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to "Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System" P143.
■ When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P325.
■ Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key
Fob" P376.
■ Replacing Access Key Fob
Access key fobs can be replaced at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
■ Certification for Keyless
Access with Push-Button
Start System
U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB03
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
B. 106 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System
107
Keys and Doors
2
Canada-spec. models Mexico-spec. models
IFT
RLVDE1415-1661
14AHK
DENSO
204232
204234
204233
B. 107 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Immobilizer
108
2-2. Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
can be used to operate your vehicle. If
engine start is attempted with an unregis-
tered access key fob or key, the engine
will not start. Even if the engine does start,
it will stop after a few seconds. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guarantee.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the
following security precautions:
- Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
- Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and lock the
doors.
- Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
■ Security Indicator Light
Refer to "Security Indicator Light" P148.
■ Key Replacement
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is seven.
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code
still remains in the memory of the vehi-
cle’s immobilizer system. For security
reasons, the lost key’s ID code should
be erased from the memory. To erase
the lost key’s ID code, all keys that will
be used are required.
For details about new key registration
and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
■ Certification for Immobilizer
System
Refer to "Certification for Keyless Access
with Push-Button Start System" P106.
CAUTION
Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the
system cannot be guaranteed.
B. 108 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Remote Keyless Entry System
109
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
2-3. Remote Keyless Entry
System
Access key fob
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener button
4) PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
Locking and unlocking the doors and
fuel filler lid
Opening the trunk lid
Sounding a panic alarm
Arming and disarming the alarm
system. For details, refer to "Alarm
System" P114.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The system’s operable
distance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system
will not be activated when the push-
button ignition switch is in any posi-
tion other than the “OFF” position.
The hazard warning flashers will
flash once or twice when the access
key fob button is pressed in the
following cases.
- When locking the doors
- When unlocking the doors
If desired, you can turn the hazard
warning flashers off by operating the
center information display. For details,
refer to "Car settings"
P165. The set-
ting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
The setting of the Remote Keyless
Entry System operation can be
changed by your SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details. For details, refer to "Function
Settings and Adjustments Performed
by a Dealer"
P391.
CAUTION
Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
Do not take the remote trans-
mitter apart except when
replacing the battery.
Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect the
operation of the airplane. When
you carry the remote transmitter
in a bag on an airplane, take
measures to prevent the buttons
of the remote transmitter from
being pressed.
202502
1
2
3
4
B. 109 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Remote Keyless Entry System
110
■ Locking the Doors
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp will sound
once and the hazard warning flashers will
flash once.
If any of the doors are not fully closed, an
electronic chirp sounds 5 seconds to alert
you that the doors are not properly closed.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
An electronic chirp sounds once.
The hazard warning flashers flash
once.
■ Unlocking the Doors
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door and the fuel filler lid. An electronic
chirp will sound twice and the hazard
warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock
all doors, briefly press the “ ” button again
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “ ” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors) is
extremely short, the system may not
respond.
■ Opening the Trunk Lid
Press and hold the “ ” button to open
the trunk lid. An electronic chirp will sound
once.
This operation setting can be changed by
a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
■ Setting Audible Signal Oper-
ation (If Equipped)
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock.
If desired, you can turn the audible signal
off by operating the center information
display. For details, refer to "Car settings"
P165. Furthermore, the volume setting
of the audible signal can also be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details.
■ Selecting Hazard Warning
Flasher Operation
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to "Car
settings" P165. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
■ Vehicle Finder Function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30
feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing
the “ ” button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not
respond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
■ Sounding a Panic Alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers, headlights, side marker
lights, tail lights and map lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 60 seconds.
B. 110 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Door Locks
111
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
■ Replacing the Battery
Refer to "Replacing Battery" P375.
■ Replacing Lost Transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secu-
rity reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmit-
ters programmed into the remote keyless
entry system.
2-4. Door Locks
■ Locking and Unlocking from
the Outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with an
emergency key and open the door
while the alarm system is armed, the
alarm system is triggered and the vehi-
cle’s horn sounds. In this case, per-
form any of the following operations:
Press unlock button on the access
key fob.
Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” position.
Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following proce-
dures.
- Grip the door handle.
- Press the trunk opener button.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to "Alarm System"
P114.
▼ How to lock and unlock the vehicle
using the emergency key
1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
2) Rotate the key toward the rear to
unlock.
In this case, only the driver’s side door is
locked or unlocked.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If
the key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is fac-
ing and insert it again.
▼ How to lock the vehicle without
using the key
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
2
1
204167
B. 111 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Door Locks
112
▽ Locking using lock lever
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was oper-
ated will be locked.
▽ Locking using power door
locking switch
1) Press the side of the power door
locking switch*.
2) Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to "How to operate the power
door locking switches" P113.
In this case, all closed doors, the fuel filler
lid are locked at the same time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the
key inside the vehicle before locking
the doors from the outside without the
key.
■ Locking and Unlocking from
the Inside
▼ How to use the lock lever
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door
from the inside, rotate the lock lever rear-
ward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
trunk lid are closed before starting to
drive.
2
1
204134
2
1
204135
202960
1
2
B. 112 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Door Locks
113
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
▼ How to operate the power door
locking switches
All doors and the fuel filler lid can be
locked and unlocked by pressing either
side of the power door locking switches
located on the driver’s side and the
passenger’s side doors.
1) Lock
2) Unlock
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the
key inside the vehicle before locking
the doors from the outside using the
power door locking switches.
■ Key Lock-In Prevention
Function
All the doors will not lock when the power
door locking switch is pushed with the
door open while the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
▼
Non-operation of key lock-in
prevention function
When the system is set so that it does not
operate, the doors are locked by the
following operation.
If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
■ Battery Drainage Prevention
Function
If a door is not completely closed, the inte-
rior lights will remain illuminated as a
result. However, several lights are auto-
matically turned off by the battery
drainage prevention function to prevent
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts, locking the doors
reduces the chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a
door from being accidentally
opened, and intruders from unex-
pectedly opening doors and enter-
ing your vehicle.
202961
1
2
B. 113 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Alarm System
114
the battery from going dead. The following
interior lights are affected by this function.
NOTE
The default setting for this function
is set as “operational”. The opera-
tional/non-operational setting of this
function can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to
change the setting.
When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors are completely
closed.
The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate when the
ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON”
position.
The battery drainage prevention
function for the push-button ignition
switch. For details, refer to "Battery
drainage prevention function" P126.
2-5. Alarm System
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for deactivation at the time of shipment
from the factory. You can set the system
for activation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer. Refer to "Alarm
System Setting" P115.
■ Alarm System Operation
When the alarm system is armed, it is trig-
gered by the opening any of the doors, the
trunk lid or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the
following alarms when triggered.
The vehicle’s horn will sound for 60
seconds.
The hazard warning flashers, head-
lights, side marker lights, tail lights and
map lights will flash for 60 seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the map lights (illu-
minates only when the door interlock
switch is in the “DOOR” position).
■ Arming the System
The alarm system becomes armed when
the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the
vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
following methods.
Locking using the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
"Remote Keyless Entry System"
P109.
Locking using the keyless access
function. For details, refer to "Locking
with the door lock sensor" P99.
Locking using the power door
locking switch. For details, refer to
"Locking using power door locking
switch" P112.
Item
Switch
posi-
tion
Automatically turn-
ing off
Map lights DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
―
Approximately 20
minutes later
B. 114 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Alarm System
115
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
Security indicator light
NOTE
All doors, the trunk lid and fuel filler
lid will lock, an electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the secu-
rity indicator light will turn on.
If any of the doors are not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds 5
seconds to alert you that the doors are
not properly closed. When you close
the door, doors will automatically lock
and the system will automatically arm
in 30 seconds.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state,
the security indicator light will then flash
slowly (once approximately every 3
seconds), indicating that the system has
been armed for surveillance.
NOTE
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open. Always make sure
that they are fully closed before arming
the system.
If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
- Doors (including the trunk lid)
are unlocked.
- Any door (including the engine
hood) is opened.
- Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position
■ Disarming the System
Perform either of the following proce-
dures.
Briefly press a button (for less than 2
seconds) on the access key fob.
Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures.
- Grip the door handle.
- Press the trunk opener button
- Unlock using the PIN code access.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will blinks slowly (once approximately
every 3 seconds), indicating that the alarm
system has been disarmed.
▼
Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key fob, you can disarm the
system without using the access key fob.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “OFF” position
to the “ON” position.
NOTE
If the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure
described in "Switching Power Status"
P326. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to "Replac-
ing Battery of Access Key Fob"
P376.
■ Alarm System Setting
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
"Disarming the System" P115.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors, the trunk lid and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
204136
B. 115 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Windows
116
4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s door
within the following 1 second, and wait 10
seconds without releasing the switch. The
setting will then be changed as follows.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
■ If You Have Accidentally
Triggered the Alarm System
▼ To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
Press unlock button on the access key
fob.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” position.
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
is not registered, the alarm will not
stop.
2-6. Windows
NOTE
In order to make opening and
closing the doors easier, completely
closed windows are linked to door
operations. Therefore, when a door is
opened, its window opens slightly.
When a door is closed, its window
closes completely. However, if the
battery has discharged or is discon-
nected, this function will not operate.
If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automat-
ically stopped to prevent further
jamming, entrapment or malfunction.
- The closing window slides down
slightly and stops.
- The opening window stops
sliding down.
The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an
abnormality in the following cases.
- A substantial sized object is
caught between the window and the
roof side (between the front pillar
and a point over the rear seat).
- A foreign object is caught
between the window and the roof
side (between the front pillar and a
point over the rear seat).
- The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole.
The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is auto-
matically stopped by the system.
Setting
status
Combination
meter display
(color TFT)
Horn
Activate AL ON Once
Deactivate AL OFF Twice
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
When operating the power
windows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
Always lock the passengers’
windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the
vehicle.
Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety
reasons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
B. 116 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Windows
117
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
■ Power Window Operation
▼ Power window switches
Driver’s side power window switches:
1) For left window
2) For right window
3) Lock switch
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the driver
side door.
Passenger’s side power window
switches:
Passenger’s window can be controlled by
the power window switch located on the
door.
▼ Operating the window
With one-touch auto up and down
feature
1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.
NOTE
Avoid the following.
Continuously operating a switch in
the same direction after the window is
fully closed or fully opened.
After the windows are fully opened
or closed, if both switches of the power
window switch on the driver’s side are
operated continuously, a fuse may
1
2
3
204137
204138
202972
1
2
3
4
B. 117 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Windows
118
blow and the windows will not be able
to be opened or closed. If the windows
cannot be opened or closed, check the
fuses and replace them as necessary.
Refer to "Fuses" P371.
Also, after replacing a fuse, make sure
to initialize the power windows. Refer
to "Initialization of Power Window"
P118.
▼
Anti-entrapment function
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the roof side (between the front pillar and
a point over the rear seat), it automatically
moves down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while window
is opening automatically, the window will
stop.
NOTE
If a window detects an impact
similar to that caused by trapping an
object (for example, when the vehicle
encounters a deep pothole), the anti-
entrapment function may operate.
You cannot close the window for a
few seconds after the anti-entrapment
function operates.
▼
Off delay function
The windows can be operated for approx-
imately 40 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position. If a door is opened within 40
seconds, the off delay function is
canceled.
▼
Locking the passenger’s window
1) Lock
2) Unlock
When the lock switch is in the lock posi-
tion, the passenger’s window cannot be
opened or closed.
■ Initialization of Power
Window
If the one-touch auto up and down func-
tion or off delay function does not operate
properly, operate each window according
to the following procedure in order to
initialize the power window system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test the power
window operation using body
parts fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
If an object is caught just before
the window fully closes, the
system may not operate properly.
12
204139
B. 118 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Trunk Lid
119
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
3. Open the window completely and then
press and hold down the power window
switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch for
approximately 1 second.
2-7. Trunk Lid
WARNING
To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while the engine is running.
Check that the trunk is
completely closed before driving.
If it is not, it may suddenly open,
which could lead to an accident.
Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
CAUTION
Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the trunk lid.
Before opening and closing the
trunk, carefully check your
surroundings to make sure it will
not strike any people or objects.
Pay attention to hot engine
exhaust gas when loading and
unloading cargo, as it could
possibly cause burns.
Be careful opening the trunk
when the wind is strong. The
trunk lid could close or open
suddenly, possibly causing inju-
ries.
Make sure that the trunk is
completely open when using it. If
it is not, the trunk lid may
suddenly drop and cause serious
injury.
Remove snow and ice from the
trunk lid before opening it. Not
doing so could cause the trunk lid
to fall after it is opened.
Under the following conditions,
the trunk lid may close unexpect-
edly, striking people or objects in
its path:
- Parking on a slope, with the
rear of the vehicle lower than
its front. In this case, make
sure the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before loading or
unloading cargo.
B. 119 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Trunk Lid
120
■ To Open and Close the Trunk
Lid from Outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
Refer to "Opening trunk" P100.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the
access key fob.
- The trunk lock/unlock setting is
set to on.
- All doors are unlocked.
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
- Installing parts or accessories
that place excess weight on
the trunk lid. Install only
genuine SUBARU parts and
accessories.
- Loading baggage or other
heavy items by throwing or
otherwise forcefully loading
them into the trunk. Always
load cargo with care.
Do not push the trunk lid forcibly
to close it. It could deform the
metal.
The trunk lid is equipped with
damper stays that hold the trunk
lid in place. Observe the following
precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
damage to trunk lid damper
stays, resulting in a malfunction.
- Do not attach any foreign
objects such as stickers,
plastic sheets and adhesives
to damper stay rods.
- Do not touch damper stay
rods with gloves or other
fabric items.
- Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine parts to
the trunk lid.
- Do not apply lateral force to
damper stays or place your
hand on it.
Do not pull on or disassemble the
trunk lid damper stays, or
dispose of them in a fire. Illustra-
tions on the trunk lid damper
stays indicate the following:
- : Do not pull
- : Do not disassemble
- : Do not dispose of in fire
204209
B. 120 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Trunk Lid
121
Keys and Doors
2
– CONTINUED –
■ To Open the Trunk Lid from
Inside
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
for more than 1 second.
■ Internal Trunk Lid Release
Handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the handle. This operation
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately an
hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
204140
204141
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release han-
dle. If the driver starts the vehicle
without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
Do not close the lid while gripping
the release handle. The handle
may be damaged.
Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage of
the handle.
Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
B. 121 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Trunk Lid
122
▼ Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. To lock it, press the latch with the
screwdriver shaft until it clicks.
This places the latch in the locked posi-
tion.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
204142
204143
204144
B. 122 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Instruments and Controls
3
Instruments and Controls
3-1. Push-Button Ignition Switch..............................125
Safety Precautions .......................................................125
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System .......125
Switching Power Status...............................................125
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly.......................................................................126
3-2. Hazard Warning Flasher.....................................127
3-3. Meters and Gauges.............................................127
Speedometer.................................................................127
Tachometer ...................................................................127
Odometer and Double Trip Meter................................128
Fuel Gauge ....................................................................129
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ..........................129
Outside Temperature ...................................................129
Combination Meter Settings........................................130
3-4. REV indicator light and buzzer ..........................130
3-5. Illumination Brightness Control ........................130
Auto Dimmer Cancel Function....................................131
3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ............................131
Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime .............................131
SRS Airbag System Warning Light.............................135
Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF
Indicators ....................................................................135
CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction
Indicator Light ............................................................136
Coolant Temperature Low Indicator Light/Coolant
Temperature High Warning Light .............................136
Charge Warning Light..................................................137
Oil Pressure Warning Light .........................................137
AT OIL TEMP Warning Light (AT Models) .................138
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (If Equipped) ........138
ABS Warning Light.......................................................140
Brake System Warning Light.......................................140
Low Fuel Warning Light .............................................. 141
Door Open Indicator .................................................... 141
Power Steering Warning Light ................................... 141
TRAC OFF Indicator Light........................................... 142
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) Warning Light/
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) Operation
Indicator Light............................................................ 142
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF Indicator
Light ........................................................................... 143
Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the
Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System.... 143
Security Indicator Light............................................... 148
Drive Mode Indicator Light (If Equipped) .................. 148
Select Lever (AT Models Only)/Gear Position
Indicator ..................................................................... 149
Cruise Control Indicator Light (White/Green)/
Cruise Control Warning Light (Yellow) (Models
without the EyeSight System).................................. 149
Turn Signal Indicator Lights....................................... 149
High Beam Indicator Light .......................................... 150
High Beam Assist Indicator (If Equipped) ................. 150
Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning
Light............................................................................ 150
LED Headlight Warning Light ..................................... 150
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator
Light (If Equipped)..................................................... 150
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light
(If Equipped)............................................................... 150
Headlight Indicator Light ............................................ 150
Hill Start Assist Indicator Light .................................. 150
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped).............. 150
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)..................... 150
Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .......................... 151
B. 123 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Instruments and Controls
RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)......................... 151
RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ................................151
Master Warning Light ..................................................151
3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color TFT) ...........151
Basic Operation............................................................152
Meter Information Screen............................................152
Drive Information .........................................................153
Exclusive Content for SUBARU BRZ ......................... 154
Navigation System-Linked Display ............................156
Audio System-Linked Display.....................................156
Driving Support System Settings Display .................157
Settings Display ...........................................................157
Warning Message Display ........................................... 159
Telltale Screen..............................................................159
3-8. Center Information Display (CID).......................160
Features ........................................................................160
Touch Screen Operations ...........................................160
Main Screen .................................................................. 161
3-9. Clock ....................................................................172
Setting the Clock Manually .........................................172
Setting the Clock Automatically ................................. 173
3-10. Light Control Switch ........................................ 174
Headlights .....................................................................174
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) .............................176
Headlight Flasher .........................................................176
High Beam Assist Function (If Equipped)..................177
Daytime Running Light System ..................................180
3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
(If Equipped) ..................................................... 180
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler .................................. 182
3-13. Turn Signal Lever............................................. 182
One-Touch Lane Changer ...........................................182
3-14. Wiper and Washer............................................ 183
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ...................184
3-15. Defogger ........................................................... 185
3-16. Mirrors............................................................... 186
Inside Mirror..................................................................186
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink
®
(Dealer Option) ...........................................................186
Outside Mirrors.............................................................194
3-17. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel ....................... 195
3-18. Horn................................................................... 195
A4600BEscusenvhch03.fm 124 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２２分
Push-Button Ignition Switch
125
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
3-1. Push-Button Ignition
Switch
■ Safety Precautions
Refer to "Safety Precautions" P94.
■ Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the
antennas inside the vehicle, the push-
button ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible to
switch the power or to start the engine.
Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places. It may become
impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
- On the instrument panel
- On the floor
- Inside the glove box
- Inside the door trim pocket
- On the rear seat
- On the rear shelf
When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine, if
the access key fob battery is
discharged, perform the procedure
described in "Access Key Fob – If
Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly" P325. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to "Replacing Battery of Access Key
Fob" P376.
■ Switching Power Status
1) Push-button ignition switch
The power status is switched every time
the push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the shift lever in neutral (MT
models) or the select lever in the “P” posi-
tion (AT models).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the clutch pedal (MT
models) or the brake pedal (AT models).
Every time the button is pressed, the
power is switched in the sequence of
“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”.
1
2
306779
1
702836
B. 125 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Push-Button Ignition Switch
126
NOTE
When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
When the steering lock cannot be
released, the message appears on the
combination meter. When this occurs,
press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left
and right.
▼
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
When the push-button ignition switch is
left in the “ACC” for more than 20 minutes
or “ON” position for approximately 1 hour,
the push-button ignition switch will be
automatically switched to “OFF” to
prevent the battery from going dead. (In
AT models, this function is activated when
the select lever is in the “P” position.)
■ When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P325.
Power
status
Combination
meter display
Operation
OFF ―
Power is turned
off.
ACC “ACCESSORY”
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and
accessory power
outlet.
ON “IGNITION ON”
All electrical
systems can be
used.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging, do not leave
the push-button ignition switch in
the “ON” or “ACC” position for a
long time.
If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
- Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
- Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand
that is soiled with oil or other
contaminants.
If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
B. 126 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Hazard Warning Flasher
127
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
3-2. Hazard Warning Flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights
and the turn signal indicator lights will
flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
3-3. Meters and Gauges
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
■ Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
■ Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
NOTE
The initial movement of the bar display
that occurs when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position can be
activated or deactivated.
For details, refer to "General settings"
P161.
901197
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with
the pointer of the tachometer in
the red zone. In this range, fuel
injection will be cut by the engine
control module to protect the
engine from overrevving. The
engine will resume running
normally after the engine speed is
reduced below the red zone.
Pay extra attention to the engine
speed when the engine is cold, as
the red zone will be lower than
normal.
B. 127 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Meters and Gauges
128
■ Odometer and Double Trip
Meter
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Odometer
3) Trip meter
This meter displays the odometer/trip
meter when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
TRIP RESET switch.
To reset the trip meter, select either the A
trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the
TRIP RESET switch.
▼ Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the odome-
ter/trip meter will light up. The indica-
tors will turn off when the TRIP RESET
switch is not operated for approxi-
mately 10 seconds.
▼ Double trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
NOTE
If the connection between the
combination meter and battery is
broken for any reason such as vehicle
maintenance or fuse replacement, the
data recorded on the trip meter will be
lost.
If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the odom-
eter/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
1
2
3
306781
306961
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
B. 128 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Meters and Gauges
129
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
■ Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“ACC” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
■ Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
■ Outside Temperature
Displays the outside temperature within
the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator
comes on when the ambient temperature
is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
NOTE
The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the
update may be delayed in the follow-
ing conditions.
While parking or driving at low
speeds
When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing through
a tunnel)
When starting the engine after being
parked for a certain period of time
306783
B02099
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to "Engine Overheating"
P319.
B. 129 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
REV indicator light and buzzer
130
■ Combination Meter Settings
Some meter settings can be set on the
center information display. For details,
perform the procedures described in
"General settings" P161.
3-4. REV indicator light and
buzzer
The REV alarm system has the following
functions.
When the engine speed reaches a set
speed, the select lever/gear position indi-
cator will illuminate in orange and a
buzzer will sound.
If the engine speed enters the red
zone, the select lever/gear position indi-
cator will illuminate in red.
The factory setting (default setting) for this
function is set as “OFF”.
To change the REV indicator light and
buzzer settings, perform the procedures
described in "Settings Display" P157
3-5. Illumination Brightness
Control
The illumination brightness of the combi-
nation meter and center information
display dims under the following condi-
tions.
The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ”
position when the ambient light is dark.
The light switch is in the “AUTO” posi-
tion and the headlights illuminate auto-
matically.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
306963 306785
B. 130 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
131
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
The brightness setting is not
canceled even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position.
■ Auto Dimmer Cancel Func-
tion
When the ambient light is bright, the illumi-
nation brightness is set to the maximum
regardless of the position of the control
dial. In this case, you cannot adjust the
illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is
dark, you can dim the illumination bright-
ness as described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
3-6. Warning and Indicator
Lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits
checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the igni-
tion switch to the “ON” position. For the
system check, the following lights illumi-
nate and turn off after several seconds or
after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt
warning light turns off only when the
driver fastens the seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light (The seatbelt warning light turns
off only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: Rear passenger’s seatbelt warning
light (The seatbelt warning light turns
off only when the rear seat
passenger fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light
: Coolant temperature high warning
light (red)
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
/ :ABS warning light
: Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
warning light/Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) operation indicator
light
: Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF
indicator light
: TRAC OFF indicator light
/ :Brake system warning light (red)
:Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (if
equipped)
: Low fuel warning light
:Master warning light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
■ Seatbelt Warning Light
and Chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and
passenger’s seats, as required by current
safety standards.
B. 131 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
132
▼ Driver’s and front passenger’s
seats
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their
seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights
in the locations indicated in the following
illustration and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
▽ Operation
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front
passenger’s warning light will illuminate,
then it will blink for several seconds. If the
seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not
fastened, the warning chime may make a
peep sound.
NOTE
If the driver’s and/or front
passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not
fastened while driving, the seatbelt
warning system operates as follows
according to the vehicle speed.
- The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h) or less.
- The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will make a peep
sound when driving between
approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and
13 mph (20 km/h). The warning
chime will stop when the vehicle
stops.
- The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when 15 seconds have elapsed
while driving between approxi-
mately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph
(20 km/h).
- The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when driving approximately more
than 13 mph (20 km/h).
The warning light will turn off and
the warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
system for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
seatbelt warning system monitors whether
or not there is a passenger on the front
passenger’s seat.
306786
306787
B. 132 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Warning and Indicator Lights
133
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
If the seatbelt warning system for the front
passenger’s seat does not function
correctly (e.g., it is activated even when
the front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front
passenger has not fastened his/her
seatbelt), take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant, although we
strongly recommend that all children sit in
the rear seat properly restrained.
Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
Ensure that the backward-forward
position and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning system for front
passenger’s seat does not function
correctly after taking relevant corrective
actions described above, immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
▼
Rear passenger’s seats
1) Rear seat (left position)
2) Rear seat (right position)
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light and
chime reminds the rear passenger to
fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the
warning lights in the locations indicated in
the above illustration and sounding a
chime.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the
seatback.
Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to"Front Seats" P30
WARNING
The driver must check that the all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts properly since the
seatbelt warning system may not
detect passengers under the
following circumstances.
21
306788
B. 133 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Warning and Indicator Lights
134
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seat detects if the seat is occupied
by a passenger. Heavy cargo or large
pets on the rear seat may result in the
activation of the passenger seatbelt
warning light and chime. Fastening the
rear seatbelt prior to loading cargo or
large pets will avoid activating the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime.
When folding the rear seat, ensure
that the seat is empty prior to folding.
Items caught between the seat bottom
and seatback, when folded, may
damage the seat surface or activate the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime.
▽ Operation
If passengers in the rear seats do not
fasten their seatbelts while the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or
blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not
fastened.
NOTE
If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)
are/is still not fastened while driving,
the seatbelt warning system operates
as follows according to the vehicle
speed.
- The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h) or less.
- When driving approximately
between 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph
(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not
fastened for 50 seconds, the
seatbelt warning lights will blink and
a warning chime will sound.
The chime will make a peep sound
for 15 seconds, and it then will
become louder and continue for 35
seconds. The warning light will blink
for 50 seconds, then it will illuminate
steadily and the chime will stop.
- When driving more than approxi-
mately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts
are not fastened for 35 seconds, the
warning lights of the unfastened
seatbelts will blink and a chime will
sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts
are not fastened after 35 seconds,
the blinking warning light will illumi-
nate steadily and the chime will
stop. The warning lights will
continue to illuminate until their
seatbelts are fastened.
The warning light will turn off and
the warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
- When cushions or child
restraint systems, etc., are
used.
- When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat.
Observe the following precau-
tions
- Do not apply any strong
impact to the rear seat.
- Do not fold the seatback
forward when objects are on
the seat.
- Do not spill liquid on the rear
seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
- Do not remove or disassemble
the rear seat.
B. 134 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Warning and Indicator Lights
135
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
■ SRS Airbag System
Warning Light
For details about the components moni-
tored by the warning light, refer to "SRS
Airbag System Monitors" P87.
■ Front Passenger’s Frontal
Airbag ON and OFF Indica-
tors
:Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
:Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located as shown in the
illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi-
cators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked.
Following the system check, both indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one
of the indicators illuminates depending on
the status of the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system moni-
toring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illuminated or off simultane-
ously even after the system check period,
the system is malfunctioning. Contact
your SUBARU dealer immediately for an
inspection.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and consult a SUBARU
dealer. Unless a technician checks
and repairs the system as needed,
the seatbelt pretensioners and/or
the SRS airbag will not operate
properly in the event of a collision,
which may result in injury.
Flashing or flickering of the
warning light
No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
Continuous illumination of the
warning light
Illumination of the warning light
while driving
306789
B. 135 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
136
■ CHECK ENGINE
Warning Light/
Malfunction Indicator Light
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is at least one problem or poten-
tial problem somewhere in the emission
control system.
▼
If the light illuminates constantly
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system
malfunction has been detected.
We recommend that you have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the
fuel filler cap is not tightened until it
clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator light
turn off immediately. It may take several
driving trips. If the light does not turn off,
take your vehicle to your authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
▼
If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been
detected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should conform
to the following instructions.
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard acceleration.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
Reduce the amount of cargo, if
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light may stop
blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
■ Coolant Temperature
Low Indicator Light/
Coolant Temperature High
Warning Light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and
repaired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION
After turning the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, if this indi-
cator light/warning light behaves
under any of the following condi-
tions, the electrical system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection.
- It remains blinking in RED.
- It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
- It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
While driving, if this indicator
light/warning light behaves under
any of the following conditions,
take the specified appropriate
measure listed below.
B. 136 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
137
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
This coolant temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
cient warming up of the engine
Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating
Illumination in RED indicates over-
heating condition of the engine
For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for
approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
After that, this indicator light/warning light
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
turns off when the engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
If the engine coolant temperature
increases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
At this time, the engine is close to over-
heating.
If the engine coolant temperature
increases further, the indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED continu-
ously. At this time, the engine may be
overheating.
When the indicator light/warning light
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
refer to the emergency steps for the
engine overheating. Refer to "Engine
Overheating" P319. After that, have the
system checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Also, if the indicator light/warning light
often blinks in RED, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if
the indicator light/warning light turns
off after a short time.
■ Charge Warning Light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
■ Oil Pressure Warning
Light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
- Blinking or illuminated in
RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as
soon as possible, and refer to
the emergency steps for the
engine overheating. After that,
have the system checked by
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Refer to "Engine Overheating"
P319
- Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
B. 137 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
138
engine at the first safe opportunity and
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
■ AT OIL TEMP Warning
Light (AT Models)
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, imme-
diately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
let the engine idle until the warning light
turns off.
■ Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light (If
Equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure
warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 2 seconds to check that the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is
functioning properly. If there is no problem
and all tires are properly inflated, the light
will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure tell-
tale. When the system detects a malfunc-
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
B. 138 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
139
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Oth-
erwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement
and/or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem is NOT a substitute for manu-
ally checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked period-
ically (at least monthly) using a tire
gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure moni-
toring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 25 mph (40
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low pres-
sure threshold, the low tire pres-
sure warning light should turn off a
few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
B. 139 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
140
■ ABS Warning Light
The ABS warning light illuminates
together with the brake system warning
light if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system malfunc-
tion warning, refer to "Brake System
Warning Light" P140.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been
started, but it turns off while driving.
The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
■ Brake System
Warning Light
This light has the following functions.
▼
Parking brake warning
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
▼
Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
CAUTION
If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
- The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
- The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
- The warning light illuminates
during driving.
When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is off),
the ABS function shuts down;
however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate
normally.
WARNING
Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
B. 140 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
141
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the reser-
voir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the
vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
▼
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
If the warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately
and contact a SUBARU dealer.
▼
Vacuum pressure system warning
The brake system warning light will illumi-
nate when the vacuum pressure sensor is
malfunctioning or brake booster pressure
is decreasing. If the light continues to illu-
minate for several minutes after starting
the engine, there may be a malfunction in
the vacuum system. In this case, drive the
vehicle carefully and have the system
inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
■ Low Fuel Warning Light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
mately 1.8 US gal (7.0 liters, or 1.5 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Door Open Indicator
When any of the doors or the trunk lid is
not fully closed, the door open indicator
appears. This function is effective even if
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC”
position.
The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open indicator.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
■ Power Steering
Warning Light
While the engine is running, a warning
light illuminates and a buzzer sounds if a
malfunction is detected in the electric
power steering system.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent
the system components, such as the
control computer and drive motor,
from overheating.
The steering wheel is operated
frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light illu-
minates. Engine misfires as a result
of an empty tank could cause dam-
age to the engine.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
B. 141 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
142
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes
power assist limitation to occur too
frequently, that may result in a mal-
function of the power steering control
system.
■ TRAC OFF Indicator
Light
This light illuminates when the TRAC
system is off. For details, refer to "Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC System"
P247.
■ Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC)
Warning Light/Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) Oper-
ation Indicator Light
▼ Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
warning light
NOTE
If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) system itself
malfunctions, the warning light only
illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-
lock Brake System) remains fully oper-
ational.
The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system malfunctions.
The Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system is probably inoperative under any
of the following conditions. Have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) sys-
tem may be considered normal.
The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately and remains off.
The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
CAUTION
The Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system becomes
unable to provide ABS control. As a
result, the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system becomes inoperative,
causing the warning light to illumi-
nate. Although both the Vehicle Sta-
bility Control (VSC) and ABS are
inoperative in this case, the ordi-
nary functions of the brake system
are still available. You will be safe
while driving in this condition, but
drive carefully and have your vehi-
cle checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
B. 142 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
143
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
▼
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
operation indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the TRAC system.
NOTE
The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system is probably malfunctioning under
the following condition. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
■ Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) OFF
Indicator Light
The light illuminates when “Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC)” is selected to
deactivate the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system.
The Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system is probably malfunctioning under
any of the following conditions. Have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
The light does not illuminate while the
system check.
The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
■ Warning Chimes and
Warning Indicator of the
Keyless Access with Push-
Button Start System
Access key warning indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations
and help protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the
outside warning chime can be changed by
a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
306791
B. 143 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
144
NOTE
Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided
depending on the status of the access
key fob and the environmental condi-
tions.
When the access key fob is taken
out of the vehicle through an open
window, the access key takeout
warning or passenger access key
takeout warning will not be provided.
▼
List of warnings
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if a steering
lock warning message is displayed
on the combination meter when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering lock is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
If a steering lock system malfunc-
tion warning message is
displayed on the combination
meter, there could be a steering
lock malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
When the keyless access system
warning message is displayed on
the combination meter, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
B. 144 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
145
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Status Action
Ding, ding ...
(intermittent)
―
The driver’s door is opened while the push-button
ignition switch is “ACC”. (in AT models, when the
select lever is in the “P” position.)
Switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”, or
close the driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the
push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch is switched to
“OFF” while the driver’s door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Lockout warning:
The doors are locked by following methods when
an access key fob is left in the car.
The door is closed when the lock lever of the
door is in the lock position.
The door is closed when the power door locking
switch is in the lock position.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the doors.
The doors cannot be locked while the access key
fob is inside the vehicle.
A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will be
unlocked.
―
Short beep
(2 seconds)
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the push-
button ignition switch is “OFF” and the access key
fob is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the doors.
If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the doors
cannot be locked.
―
Short beep (5 sec-
onds)
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position and one of the doors
is opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
If one of the doors is opened, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding
Long beep (60 sec-
onds max.)
Power warning:
For AT models, the door lock sensor is touched
while you are carrying the access key fob, the
push-button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” and the select lever is in the “P” posi-
tion.
Return the access key fob inside the vehicle, or
switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
If the push-button ignition switch is not switched to
“OFF”, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding, ding ...
(7 seconds)
―
Access key warning:
The vehicle is driven while the access key fob is not
inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.
B. 145 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
146
Ding ―
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch is pressed while the
access key fob is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and press the push-but-
ton ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 times)
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access key fob
and closes the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF” and
the select lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”,
and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 times)
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the
access key fob and closes a door other than the
driver’s door while the push-button ignition switch is
in a position other than “OFF”.
Return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or
switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
Access key takeout without “P” position warn-
ing (AT models):
The driver exits the vehicle with the access key fob
and closes the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF” and
the select lever is in a position other than the “P”
position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position, switch the
push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
―
Select lever position warning (AT models):
Case 1: The engine is turned off by pressing the
push-button ignition switch while the select lever
is in a position other than the “P” position.
Case 2: The driver’s door is opened while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” and the select lever is in a position
other than the “P” position.
Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select lever to
the “P” position, switch the push-bu
tton ignition
switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”
and exit the vehicle.
Ding ― The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding ―
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure is performed, but the
steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and left
lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push-
button ignition switch.
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Status Action
B. 146 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
147
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
Ding ―
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction is detected in the power system or
steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and have
the vehicle inspected.
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Status Action
B. 147 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
148
■ Security Indicator
Light
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered
or the ID code does not match), the power
is not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunc-
tioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
▼
Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to "Alarm System"
P114.
▼
Immobilizer system
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
- The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
- The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered
or the ID code does not match), the power
is not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunc-
tioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates. For details about the immobilizer
system, refer to "Immobilizer" P108.
NOTE
The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It
means that the matching of the ID code
is completed and the immobilizer
system is deactivated, and it does not
indicate a malfunction.
- While the engine is running
- The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or closed
Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the func-
tionality of the immobilizer system.
■ Drive Mode Indicator Light (If
Equipped)
Drive mode indicator light
1) Sport mode
2) Snow mode
This light indicates the current drive mode.
For details of drive mode, refer to "Driving
Mode Select Switch (If Equipped)"
P241.
21
306792
B. 148 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
149
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
■ Select Lever (AT Models
Only)/Gear Position Indicator
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator (AT models only)
3) Select lever (AT models only)/gear posi-
tion indicator
This indicator shows the position of the
shift lever (MT models)/select lever (AT
models).
▼
Gear shift indicator (MT models)
When shifting up is recommended for
good fuel economy, the upshift indicator
blinks. Refer to "Gear shift indicator"
P234.
▼ Upshift/downshift indicator (AT
models)
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the available
upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer
to "Selection of Manual Mode" P239
■ Cruise Control Indi-
cator Light (White/
Green)/Cruise Control
Warning Light (Yellow)
(Models without the EyeSight
System)
This light illuminates in white when the
cruise control main button is pressed to
activate the cruise control function. When
vehicle speed has been set to use the
cruise control function, this indicator is
lighting in green.
For details, refer to "Cruise Control
(Models without the EyeSight system)"
P260.
If this light illuminates in yellow, do not use
the cruise control. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
If this indicator light does not illumi-
nate even when you press the cruise
control main button, the cruise control
system may not operate properly.
Have your vehicle checked by your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
■ Turn Signal Indicator
Lights
These lights show the operation of the
turn signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be
burned out. Have your vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
1
2
3
702774
CAUTION
If the malfunction indicator light
(Check Engine light) illuminates, the
cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates in yellow at the same time. At
this time, avoid driving at high
speeds and have your vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
B. 149 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Warning and Indicator Lights
150
■ High Beam Indicator
Light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
■ High Beam Assist Indi-
cator (If Equipped)
This indicator appears when the high
beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist func-
tion, refer to "High Beam Assist Function
(If Equipped)" P177.
■ Automatic Headlight
Beam Leveler Warning
Light
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or
does not turn off approximately 3 seconds
after turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
■ LED Headlight
Warning Light
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
■ Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF Indicator
Light (If Equipped)
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight function is off. For
details, refer to"Driving Support System
Settings Display" P157.
■ Steering Responsive
Headlight Warning
Light (If Equipped)
The light illuminates when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-
light. Refer to "Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH) (If Equipped)" P180.
■ Headlight Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
When the light switch is turned to the
“ ” or “ ” position
When the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
■ Hill Start Assist Indi-
cator Light
When the hill start assist function is
enabled, this indicator light will be illumi-
nated. It will disappear when the hill start
assist function is deactivated.
■ BSD/RCTA Warning
Indicator (If Equipped)
This warning indicator appears on the
combination meter display (color TFT)
when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is
malfunctioning for any reason. For further
details, refer to "BSD/RCTA Warning Indi-
cator" P274. If this indicator remains
displayed, have your vehicle inspected by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
■ BSD/RCTA OFF Indi-
cator (If Equipped)
This indicator appears on the combination
meter display (color TFT) when “BSD/
RCTA” is selected to deactivate the BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/
RCTA is suspended temporarily. For
B. 150 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
151
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
details, refer to "BSD/RCTA OFF Indi-
cator" P273.
■ Icy Road Surface
Warning Indicator
When the outside temperature is 37°F
(3°C) or less, the icy road surface warning
indicator will illuminate to inform the driver
that the road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor.
The icy road surface warning indi-
cator should be treated only as a guide.
Be sure to check the condition of the
road surface before driving.
Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to 41°F (5°C) or higher.
■ RAB Warning Indi-
cator (If Equipped)
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) System
malfunctions. Refer to "Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) System (If
Equipped)" P277.
■ RAB OFF Indicator (If
Equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System is turned OFF, or when the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System is suspended temporarily. Refer
to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System (If Equipped)" P277.
■ Master Warning Light
A buzzer sounds and the warning
light comes on and flashes to indicate that
the master warning system has detected a
malfunction.
3-7. Combination Meter
Display (Color TFT)
Various information will be shown on the
combination meter display (color TFT).
Also, a warning message will appear on
the display if a malfunction is detected. In
addition, several settings for the displayed
content can be performed.
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
combination meter display (color
TFT) while the vehicle is in motion.
When operation of the combination
meter display (color TFT) interferes
with your ability to concentrate on
driving, stop the vehicle before per-
forming operations on the screen.
Also, do not concentrate on the dis-
play while driving. Doing so may
cause you to look away from the
road and could result in an acci-
dent.
B. 151 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
152
Combination meter display (color TFT)
1) Meter information screen (Refer to
"Meter Information Screen" P152.)
2) Telltale screen (Refer to "Telltale
Screen" P159.)
■ Basic Operation
Control switches
1) / : Select menu icons
/ : Change displayed content,
scroll up/down the screen and move the
cursor up/down
2) Press: Enter
Press and hold: Reset
3) Return to the previous screen
For information pertaining to the content
of each menu icon, refer to the explana-
tion of each item under the heading of the
relevant menu icon.
■ Meter Information Screen
The meter information screen can be
changed.
▼ Menu icons
Select a menu icon to display its content.
*1: Displayed when the Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto is operating. For details, refer
to the separate audio Owner’s Manual.
1
2
2
307004
1 2 3
306809
Icons Page
Drive information
153
Exclusive content for
SUBARU BRZ
154
Navigation system-linked
display
*1
156and
refer to the
separate
audio
Owner’s
Manual.
Audio system-linked dis-
play
156
EyeSight screen (if
equipped)
Refer to
the
Owner’s
Manual
supple-
ment for
the Eye-
Sight sys-
tem.
Driving support system set-
tings display
157
Settings display
157
Warning message display
159
Icons Page
A4600BEscusenvhch03.fm 152 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２４分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
153
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
■ Drive Information
▼ Drive information (page 1)
1) Voltmeter
2) Engine oil temperature gauge
This screen displays the charging voltage
and engine temperature.
As voltage displayed may be different
from the actual battery voltage, use the
voltmeter as a guideline.
▼
Drive information (page 2)
1) Current fuel consumption
2) Average fuel consumption
3) Driving range
This screen displays the current rate of
fuel consumption, average fuel consump-
tion since the function was reset and esti-
mated maximum distance that can be
driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
Pressing and holding will reset the
average fuel consumption.
Use the displayed fuel consumption as
a reference.
This distance is computed based on
your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may not be
updated. When refueling, turn the push-
button ignition switch off. If the vehicle is
refueled without turning the push-button
ignition switch off, the display may not be
updated.
▼
Drive information (page 3)
1) Average vehicle speed
2) Driving time
3) Driving distance
This screen displays the average vehicle
speed since display was reset, cumulative
time the vehicle has been driven since
display was reset and the cumulative
distance the vehicle has been driven since
display was reset.
1
2
306795
1
2
3
306796
1
2
3
306797
B. 153 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
154
Pressing and holding will reset the
average vehicle speed/driving time/
driving distance.
▼ Drive information (page 4) (if
equipped)
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
The tire pressure values are
displayed several minutes after
driving.
Once the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display in
yellow until the system detects the
normal tire pressure.
Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the adjusted tire pres-
sure, the warning light will turn off and
the tire pressure values will turn to
white.
For information about the specified
value of the air pressure, refer to
"Tires" P385
■ Exclusive Content for
SUBARU BRZ
▼ G-force
1) Acceleration G-force on the vehicle
2) Accelerator pedal input
3) Brake fluid pressure
4) Steering amount
This screen displays lateral G-forces on
the vehicle.
Also displays, around the periphery of the
G-force display, the left and right steering
amount, accelerator pedal input, and
brake fluid pressure.
This display is intended for use as a guide-
line. Depending on factors such as the
road surface condition, temperature and
vehicle speed, the display may not show
the actual condition of the vehicle.
Press and hold to change the range of
the acceleration G-force display between
1.0 G and 0.5 G.
▼ G-force (peak hold function)
1) Record of the maximum G-forces
2) Acceleration G-force on the vehicle
3) Accelerator pedal input
702781
4
3
1
2
306799
1
4
2
5
3
306800
A4600BEscusenvhch03.fm 154 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
155
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
4) Brake fluid pressure
5) Steering amount
This screen displays lateral G-forces on
the vehicle
Also displays, around the periphery of the
G-force display, the left and right steering
amount, accelerator pedal input, and
brake fluid pressure
This display is intended for use as a guide-
line. Depending on factors such as the
road surface condition, temperature and
vehicle speed, the display may not show
the actual condition of the vehicle.
Press and hold to reset the record of
maximum G-forces.
▼ Power and torque curve
1) Power output
2) Torque
3) Current engine speed
The vertical bar will slide laterally
according to the current engine speed.
This chart is intended for reference only
and does not show the actual engine
torque or output.
▼ Stopwatch
Top screen
Measurement screen
1) Fastest lap time (top screen)
2) Fastest lap time (measurement screen)
3) Current lap time
4) Total lap time
5) Past lap times
6) Meter control switch operation guide
When the timer is reset, “− −’− −”− −” will
be displayed.
A maximum of 50 lap times can be
recorded.
Changing between the stopwatch
screens
To change to the measurement screen:
Press .
To change to the top screen: Press .
Operating the measurement screen
: Start/stop measurement
: Mark off one lap
2
1
3
306801
1
306802
6
2
3
4
5
306803
A4600BEscusenvhch03.fm 155 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
156
: Reset measured lap times
/ : Scroll through the lap times
Resetting measured lap times
After stopping the measurement, press
.
To display other content while the stop-
watch is operating
If the measurement screen is displayed,
press to display the top screen. Then
operate the meter control switches to
display other content. While other items
are displayed, the measurement will
continue but the stopwatch cannot be
operated.
■ Navigation System-Linked
Display
When the route guidance is set in the navi-
gation system, this item shows the naviga-
tion route information. For details about
the audio system, refer to the separate
audio Owner’s Manual.
■ Audio System-Linked
Display
This screen displays the status of audio
information. For details about the audio
system, refer to the separate audio
Owner’s Manual.
306798 306879
B. 156 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
157
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
■ Driving Support System
Settings Display
The setting adjustments to the following
systems can be changed to meet your
personal requirements.
LDW (Lane Departure Warning)
*1*2
PCB (Pre-Collision Braking)
*1*2
BSD/RCTA
*1
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking
system)
*1
(Sonar audible alarm)
*1
SRH (Steering Responsive Head-
light)
*1
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
EyeSight system.
■ Settings Display
Use the meter control switches on the
steering wheel to change settings.
1. Press or to select .
2. Operate the switches to select a
desired item.
3. Press / or / to change
the setting and then press to confirm
the change.
B. 157 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
158
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Item Settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
EyeSight
*1
Acquisition Sound ON/OFF
*2
Start Alert ON/OFF
Accel Lv. Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)
Select Drive Lane Right Lane/Left Lane
Units km, km/h, l/100km / miles, MPH, MPG 127, 151 and *2
Warning Volume
*1
Max/Mid/Min 277 and *2
Screen Settings
Startup Scrn ON/OFF -
GSI (MT models) ON/OFF 234
REV.
Indicator ON/OFF
130RPM **00rpm
Buzzer ON/OFF
Car Settings
Keyless Entry
Audible Signal
*1
ON/OFF 105 and 110
Hazard Flasher ON/OFF 106 and 110
Driver Door Unlock Driver Door Only/All 100
Defogger 15 minutes/Continuous 185
Interior Light 7.5 seconds/15 seconds/30 seconds 212
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/High/Max 174
Wiper Link ON/OFF 175
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF
175
Leaving Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF
1-Touch LN CHGR ON/OFF 182
B. 158 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Combination Meter Display (Color TFT)
159
Instruments and Controls
3
■ Warning Message Display
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a mainte-
nance notification, it will appear on combi-
nation meter display (color TFT). Take the
appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated.
■ Telltale Screen
1) Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
306794
Mark Name Page
Door open indicator
light
141
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light (if equipped)
138
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (AT models)
138
LED headlight warning
light
150
High beam assist indi-
cator light (if equipped)
150
1
1
307005
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indica-
tor light (if equipped)
150
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
(if equipped)
150
RAB warning light (if
equipped)
151
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
151
BSD/RCTA warning
indicator (if equipped)
150
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator light (if equipped)
150
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
150
Hill start assist indica-
tor light
150
Cruise control indica-
tor light (white/green)/
Cruise control warning
light (yellow) (models
without the EyeSight
system)
149
Mark Name Page
B. 159 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
160
3-8. Center Information
Display (CID)
■ Features
All information is displayed on the center
information display, including vehicle
settings, vehicle status, and audio opera-
tion.
The center information display can also be
used to set and initialize the center infor-
mation display itself.
NOTE
When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections may
not be available.
The language and units for both the
center information display and the
combination meter display (color TFT)
can be changed. For details, refer to
"Car settings" P165.
The images displayed in this
Owner’s Manual are sample images.
The actual image may vary depending
on the region and vehicle specifica-
tions.
■ Touch Screen Operations
The center information display has a
touch screen. Operations are performed
by touching the touch screen directly.
▼ Touch
Quickly touch and release once.
WARNING
Always pay attention to safe driving
when operating the center informa-
tion display while the vehicle is in
motion. When operation of the cen-
ter information display is disturbing
your awareness and ability to con-
centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
in a safe place before performing
operations on the display. Also, do
not concentrate on the display
while driving. Doing so could result
in an accident.
Items Page
Maintenance information 171
Vehicle settings 161
Rear view camera 263
Audio/telephone
Refer to
the sepa-
rate audio
Owner’s
Manual.
EyeSight (if equipped)
Refer to
the
Owner’s
Manual
supple-
ment for
the Eye-
Sight sys-
tem.
Items Page
306863
B. 160 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
161
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
▼ Drag
Touch the screen and move the screen to
the desired position.
▼
Swipe
Quickly move the screen by swiping with
your finger.
NOTE
Swipe operations may not be per-
formed smoothly in high altitudes.
■ Main Screen
To display the main screen, press
(HOME).
In this Owner’s Manual, the following
settings will be explained. For details
about other items, refer to the separate
audio Owner’s Manual.
“Settings”“General”
“Settings”“Car”
(Car settings icon)
▼
General settings
Set the time and display general items.
1. Press (HOME).
2. (Settings)
3. “General”
4. Select the preferred menu.
306864
306865
306804
306997
B. 161 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
162
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General
Clock
Time Setting
*1
Auto/Manual
172
172
Time Setting
*2
Sync With Phone/Manual 172
Clock Format 12H/24H 170
Driver Profiles ― Default/4 users
*3
―
Display
Display Off Turn the screen off. ― 170
Brightness Dial ON/OFF 130 170
Brightness/Contrast
Set and adjust the brightness and
contrast of the display.
170 170
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
*3
―
Connected to: Select the registered devise.
Available Wi-Fi Networks Add
Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup
Registered Wi-Fi Networks ―
Wi-Fi Hotspot
Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF
*4
―
Wi-Fi name (SSID): ―
Security Type: ―
Password: ―
Broadcast Frequency: 2.4 GHz/5 GHz
SSID Broadcast ON/OFF
Connected Devices: ―
A4600BEscusenvhch03.fm 162 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
163
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
General
Reminder Screen
Maintenance ON/OFF
*4
170
Birthday ON/OFF 170
Anniversary ON/OFF 170
Meter Screen
Startup Screen ON/OFF 127 170
Gear Shift Indicator (MT mod-
els)
ON/OFF 234 170
Meter Rev. Indicator Indicator/RPM/Buzzer 130 157
Camera
Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 264 170
Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 266 170
Language ― English/Français/Español 151 and 160 170
Home Screen Short-
cuts
― ON/OFF
*3
170
Birthday List ― Set a birthday.
*3
170
Anniversary List ― Set an anniversary day.
*3
171
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
B. 163 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
164
*1: Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security
*2: Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security
*3: For details about the audio system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio system.
*4: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
General
Software Update
Update Check if a new software update
*4
―
Automatically Check for
Updates
ON/OFF
Automatically Download
Updates
ON/OFF
SUBARU STARLINK
Apps Recovery
― OK/Cancel
SUBARU STARLINK
Auto Connect
― ON/OFF
Factory Data Reset ― Reset/Cancel
System Information ――
Free/Open Source
Software Information
――
Item
Available settings
Page reference
for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
Page reference
for the setting
procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
B. 164 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
165
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
▼ Car settings
Perform the EyeSight system setting and
vehicle setting.
1. Press (HOME).
2. (Settings)
3. “Car”
4. Select the preferred menu.
306998
B. 165 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
166
The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.
Item
Available settings
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem operation
Page refer-
ence for the
setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
Car
EyeSight
* 1
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF
*2
―
Lane Departure Warning ON/OFF
Cruise Control Acceleration
Characteristics
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3
(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)
Lead Vehicle Acquisition
Sound
ON/OFF
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF
Select Drive on Left/Drive on
Right
Right Lane/Left Lane
Reverse Automatic Braking
*1
Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 277 170
Automatic Braking ON/OFF 277 170
Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal
*1
ON/OFF 105 and 110 170
Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 106 and 110 170
Driver Door Unlock
*1
Driver Door Only/All 100 170
Defogger ― 15 minutes/Continuous 185 170
Interior Light ―
7.5 seconds/15 seconds/30
seconds
212 170
B. 166 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
167
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.
Car
Auto Light Sensor
Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/High/Max 174 170
Wiper Link ON/OFF 175 170
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
175
170
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds/OFF
170
One-Touch Lane Changer ― ON/OFF 182 170
BSD/RCTA
*1
― ON/OFF 274 170
Steering Responsive Head-
lights (SRH)
*1
― ON/OFF 180 170
Warning Volume
*1
― Min/Mid/Max 272, 286 and *2 170
Units ―
km, km/h, Liter/
Miles, MPH, Gallon
127 and 151 170
Item
Available settings
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem operation
Page refer-
ence for the
setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
B. 167 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
168
▼ Car settings icon
Touch to display the items that are
changeable while driving.
307002
B. 168 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
169
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
*1: If equipped
*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Item
Available settings
Page reference for
the vehicle system
operation
Page reference for
the setting proce-
dure
1st menu 2nd menu
Vehicle Control
Cruise Control Accel-
eration Characteris-
tics
*1
Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4
(Dynamic)
*2
―
Steering Responsive
Headlights (SRH)
*1
ON/OFF 180 170
Driving Assistance
*1
Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF
*2
―
Lane Departure
Warning
ON/OFF
BSD/RCTA ON/OFF 268 170
Others
Warning Volume
*1
Min/Mid/Max 277 and *2 ―
Units km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon 127 and 151 170
B. 169 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
170
▼ How to select items on the screen
▽ ON/OFF setting
Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON
or OFF .
▽ Selecting
Example
Touch the preferred item.
▼
How to set items on the screen
▽ Brightness/Contrast
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast
of the center information display.
NOTE
“Brightness” can only be adjusted
when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to
"General settings" P161.
1. Press (HOME).
2. (Settings)
3. “General”
4. “Display”
5. “Brightness/Contrast”
6. Drag to adjust the brightness and
contrast.
Touch “Default” to revert to the factory
setting.
▽ Birthday List
If a birthday or anniversary is
approaching, a message will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position. This function can be set to
on or off by “Reminder screen”. For
details, refer to "General settings" P161
1. Press (HOME).
2. (Settings)
3. “General”
4. “Birthday List”
306871
306872
306873
B. 170 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Center Information Display (CID)
171
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
5. “Add”
6. Enter the name.
7. “Next”
8. Enter the date.
9. “OK”
NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be
stored.
▽ Anniversary List
The procedure for setting an anniversary
is the same as "Birthday List" P170,
except that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is
selected.
▼
Maintenance
Maintenance reminders can be set.
Engine oil setting:
1. Touch (Maintenance).
2. (Engine Oil)
3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-
tion Distance” of the reminder.
4. “Set”
5.
Oil Filter setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Oil
Filter” item in step 2.
Tires setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Tires”
item in step 2.
306999
307000
307001
XXXX
306164
B. 171 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Clock
172
Maintenance Schedule setting:
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Mainte-
nance Schedule” item in step 2.
NOTE
Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.
Touch “Update” to revert to the
default value.
3-9. Clock
For models with a genuine SUBARU
audio system, the clock can be adjusted
using either auto mode or manual mode.
■ Setting the Clock Manually
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Press (HOME).
3. Touch (Settings).
4. “General”
5. “Clock”
6. “Time Setting”
7. “Manual”
8. or
9. “OK”
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be
displayed by touching the clock on the
status bar.
306807
306875
B. 172 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Clock
173
Instruments and Controls
3
■ Setting the Clock Automati-
cally
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Press (HOME).
3. Touch (Settings).
4. “General”
5. “Clock”
6. “Time Setting”
7. Models with SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security:
“AUTO”
Models without SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security:
“Sync With Phone”
Models without SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security:
The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
matically when a smartphone is
connected via Bluetooth
®
for transferring
phonebook data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio system. The clock
will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
For models without SUBARU STAR-
LINK Safety and Security: Depending
on the model of smartphone, the set-
tings of the connected smartphone
may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS
or other models, notification settings
may need to be activated.) For details,
check the instructions on connecting
smartphones.
▼ Models with SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security
The clock will be set automatically where
a DCM (Data Communication Module in
vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-
able.
306807
306875
B. 173 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
174
3-10. Light Control Switch
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights),
even the push-button ignition switch
is turned off.
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illumi-
nated.
■ Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the light control switch.
“OFF” position:
The headlights are all off.
*1,*2
*1: For Canada models, when the light switch is
switched to the “OFF” position while the
vehicle is stopped, the lights turn off. Then
the light switch will automatically return to
the “AUTO” position.
*2: For Canada models, the headlights will
automatically change to the AUTO mode
when the following conditions are met:
The engine is running.
The parking brake is fully released.
For AT models, the select lever is in a
position other than “P” position.
“ ” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are on.
“ ” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are on.
“AUTO” position: auto on/off head-
lights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, side marker
lights, tail lights and license plate lights
are automatically on or off depending on
the level of the ambient light.
The light sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by operating
the combination meter display (color TFT)
or the center information display. For
details, refer to "Settings Display" P157
or "Car settings" P165. Also, the setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
▼
Battery-saving function
If the headlights or tail lights are illumi-
nated when the push-button ignition
switch is off, in order to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged, the lights will
CAUTION
Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other than
the off position, the battery may
be discharged.
306964
B. 174 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
175
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
automatically be turned off after approxi-
mately 20 minutes.
If a door is opened or closed, the battery
saving function will temporarily be
canceled and the lights will automatically
be turned off after approximately 20
minutes.
▼
Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
matically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The head-
lights will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 1 minute after the wiper stops.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can
be changed by operating the combination
meter display (color TFT) or the center
information display. For details, refer to
"Settings Display" P157 or "Car
settings" P165. Also, the setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
▼
Welcome lighting function
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth
approaching to or exiting from the vehicle
at night or in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position
It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights
NOTE
If the engine is turned off after turning
off the light switch, the welcome
lighting function may not operate (for
Canada models).
▽ When approaching
While the welcome lighting function is acti-
vated, the low beam headlights will auto-
matically illuminate when unlocking the
doors by using the remote keyless entry
system.
The low beam headlights will remain illu-
minated for 30 seconds
*1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following opera-
tions is done, the low beam headlights will
turn off.
The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The doors are locked.
The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
▽ When exiting
While the welcome lighting function is acti-
vated, the low beam headlights will remain
illuminated even when the push-button
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
status.
The low beam headlights will turn off
under any of the following conditions.
30 seconds have passed since the
door is opened and closed.
*1
The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can
change the setting by operating the combi-
nation meter display (color TFT) or the
center information display. For details, refer
to "Settings Display" P157 or "Car
settings" P165.
B. 175 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
176
▼ Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
NOTE
If the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights do
not turn on when it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to “ ”
position. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
The light sensor may not operate
correctly for light other than sunlight.
■ High/Low Beam Change
(Dimmer)
While the light control switch is in the “ ”
or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the
headlights will turn on.
Pushing the lever forward and releasing it
will activate the high beam. Pulling the
lever rearward and releasing it will switch
the headlights to low beam.
For models with the High Beam Assist,
when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, pushing the lever
forward turns the High Beam Assist is on.
Refer to "High Beam Assist Function (If
Equipped)" P177.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter is also on.
■ Headlight Flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the off
position.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
306810
306965
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
306966
B. 176 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
177
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
■ High Beam Assist Function
(If Equipped)
NOTE
The high beam assist function
utilizes the stereo camera installed at
the position of the front map lights.
For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to high
beam.
When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
There is no preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to low
beam.
When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
tioning or is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the head-
light mode manually if necessary.
The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
▼
How to use the high beam assist
function
The high beam assist function will be acti-
vated when all the following conditions are
met.
The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights are
on automatically.
The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
High beam assist indicator
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the combination meter will illuminate.
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is mal-
functioning or is temporarily stopped,
the headlight will be fixed at low beam.
▼
Temporary stop of high beam
assist function
If the high beam assist function stops
temporarily due to poor visibility or
abnormal temperature, the message
appears on the combination meter. Once
the conditions have been remedied, drive
the vehicle for a while to restore the
system.
306869
B. 177 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
178
NOTE
Even when the operation conditions of
the high beam assist function are met,
there may be a case in which the high
beam assist indicator does not illumi-
nate.
▼
How to temporarily lower the sensi-
tivity of the high beam assist func-
tion
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
1. After turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control switch
to the “AUTO” position and push the
signal lever forward (high beam position).
2. After the high beam assist indicator on
the combination meter will illuminate, turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15
seconds, press the “ ” (following
distance setting) switch more than 10
times consecutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator light “ ” on the combina-
tion meter display (color TFT) will flash.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered in
the following conditions.
- Cruise control or Adaptive
Cruise Control indicator is illumi-
nated.
- The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated
The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level
the next time the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position and the
engine is restarted.
▼
How to change the headlight mode
manually
Change to the low beam:
Set the light control switch to “ ”.
Pull the lever while the high beam is
turning on and release it.
Change to the high beam:
Push the lever forward and release it.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
After manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
on the high beam assist function, push
the lever forward and release it.
When manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “ ”
position, the parking lights, side
marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights will turn on.
▼
Tips for the high beam assist
system
The high beam assist function recog-
nizes the condition surrounding the
vehicle based on the brightness of illumi-
nation ahead of your vehicle, etc. There-
fore, the headlight mode may switch in
some situations that do not match to the
driver’s sense.
A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may not
be detected correctly and the high beam
assist function may not work properly. As
a result, the glare of the high beam may
disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle
ahead. Also, the low beam mode may
continue although there are no oncoming
vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such
cases, change the headlight mode manu-
ally.
B. 178 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Light Control Switch
179
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
- In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
- When the windshield glass is dirty or
fogged.
- When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
- If there are lights similar to the head-
lights or the tail lights in the surrounding
area.
- When an oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is driven without its
headlights and tail lights on.
- If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
light beams are not aimed correctly.
- When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
- When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
- When driving on a road with many
curves.
- When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
- When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly.
- When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty.
- When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed.
- When the stereo camera is
deformed or the stereo camera lenses
are dirty.
- Immediately after the engine has
started.
In the following conditions, the head-
light mode will not be automatically
changed from the high beam to the low
beam.
- When your vehicle passes an
oncoming vehicle suddenly in a blind
curve.
- When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
- When an oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead comes in and out of view
because of continuous curves, median
strips, roadside trees, etc.
If the stereo camera detects the light of
the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
the headlight mode may change from the
high beam to the low beam automatically.
The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam mode may continue, when affected
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard.
The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
- Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights
of a vehicle ahead.
- The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow,
etc.
- Movement and direction of an
oncoming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
- When the headlights of an
oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a
vehicle ahead illuminate on only one
side.
- When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
- Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
- Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
- Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
B. 179 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (If Equipped)
180
■ Daytime Running Light
System
The daytime running lights will automati-
cally illuminate when the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
The engine is running.
The parking brake is fully released.
The light control switch is in the
“AUTO”, “ ” or “OFF” position.
For AT models, the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
While the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights
turn on automatically, the daytime
running light is deactivated.
3-11. Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH) (If
Equipped)
1) The target area of illumination when
SRH is activated
2) The target area of illumination when
SRH is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically
moves the headlight beam to the left or
right in accordance with the steering
angle. This function helps to improve the
visibility at night by illuminating the road
ahead at corners and intersections.
You can turn the SRH function on or off.
The settings can be changed by using the
combination meter display (color TFT).
For details, refer to "Driving Support
System Settings Display" P157
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
illuminated, the tail lights do not
illuminate. When it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the
“ ” position to illuminate the head-
lights and tail lights. This will
improve visibility and allow other
drivers to see your vehicle more
easily.
1
2
304837
B. 180 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (If Equipped)
181
Instruments and Controls
3
1) SRH OFF indicator
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter display (color TFT) turns off
when SRH is turned on.
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter display (color TFT) illuminates
when SRH is turned off.
1) SRH warning indicator
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning
indicator on the combination meter display
(color TFT) illuminates and a message
appears on the warning screen when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deactivated.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
NOTE
The SRH function operative/non-
operative status is kept when the
engine is turned off, even if the engine
is restarted.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
cator will illuminate and turn off after
several seconds.
SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
1
306814
1
306815
B. 181 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Headlight Beam Leveler
182
3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler
The LED headlights produce more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
and the headlight beams are angled
upwards, the driver of an oncoming
vehicle may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
optimum height automatically depending
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
3-13. Turn Signal Lever
1) Right turn
2) Lane change right signal
3) Lane change left signal
4) Left turn
To activate the turn signal:
Pushing the turn signal lever up/down and
releasing it activates the turn signal. Then
the lever returns to its original position.
To cancel the turn signal:
Push and release the turn signal lever
slightly in the opposite direction of the
active turn signal.
To signal a lane change:
1. Push the turn signal lever up or down
slightly.
2. Hold in the signal lever during the lane
change.
The turn signal indicator lights will flash in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
The lever will return automatically to the
neutral position when you release it.
■ One-Touch Lane Changer
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and imme-
diately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational set-
ting of the one-touch lane changer can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. The setting can also be
changed by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to
"Car settings" P165
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the head-
lights may become misaligned, and
the headlight beam leveler will not
reset them to the proper angle. This
may occur after transporting your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the
vehicle is parked and restarted on
different angles. In such cases,
have the headlight alignment
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
2
3
4
1
306967
B. 182 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Wiper and Washer
183
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
3-14. Wiper and Washer
NOTE
The windshield wiper motor is
protected against overloads by a
circuit breaker. If the motor operates
continuously under an unusually
heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip
to stop the motor temporarily. If this
happens, park your vehicle in a safe
location, turn off the wiper switch, and
wait for approximately 10 minutes. The
circuit breaker will reset itself, and the
wipers will again operate normally.
Clean your blade rubbers and
window glass periodically with a
washer solution to prevent streaking,
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
Do not operate the washer contin-
uously for more than 10 seconds,
or when the washer fluid tank is
empty. This may cause over-
heating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield is dry. This may
scratch the glass, damage the
blade rubbers and cause the
wiper motor to burn out. Before
operating the wiper on a dry wind-
shield always use the windshield
washer.
In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield before
switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to
the window glass could cause not
only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
rubbers are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster before turning on the
wiper.
If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe location, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position and
clean the window glass to allow
proper wiper operation.
Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to "Windshield Washer
Fluid" P366.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type
wiper blades.
Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
B. 183 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Wiper and Washer
184
and to remove accumulations of road
salt or road film. Operate the wind-
shield washer for at least 1 second so
that washer solution will be sprinkled
all over the windshield or rear window.
Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper opera-
tion and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield or rear
window and the blade rubbers using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner.
After cleaning, rinse the window glass
and blade rubbers with clean water.
The glass is clean if no beads form on
the glass when you rinse with water.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replace-
ment instructions, refer to "Replace-
ment of Wiper Blades" P367.
If the wipers do not operate in the
following conditions, turn the wiper
switch to the “ ” position.
- The wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, however, it does not work.
- The wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, however, it does not work.
In these cases, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
■ Windshield Wiper and
Washer Switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
▼
Windshield wipers
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
▼
Wiper intermittent time
control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” posi-
tion, turn the dial to adjust the operating
interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
: Mist (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
: High speed
301723
301724
B. 184 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Defogger
185
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
▼ Windshield washer
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
3-15. Defogger
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
The defogger system is activated only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Rear window and outside mirror (if
equipped) defogger button
To activate the defogger system, press
the rear window and outside mirror
defogger button. The rear window
defogger and outside mirror defogger are
activated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the button illuminates while the
defogger system is activated.
To turn them off, press the button again.
They also turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
The defogger system will automatically
shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If
the rear window and outside mirrors have
been cleared before that time, press the
button to turn them off. If defrosting or
defogging is not complete, you have to
press the button to turn them on again.
301725
1 2
306818
306819
B. 185 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
186
It is possible to set the defogger system
for the continuous operation mode by
operating the center information display.
For details, refer to "Car settings" P165.
NOTE
While the defogger system is in the
continuous operation mode, if the bat-
tery voltage drops below the permissi-
ble level, continuous operation of the
defogger system is canceled and the
system stops operating.
3-16. Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
■ Inside Mirror
1) Normal position
2) Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
■ Auto-Dimming Mirror/
Compass with HomeLink
®
(Dealer Option)
1) Display
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-
dimming feature senses distracting glare
from vehicle headlights behind you and
automatically dims to eliminate the glare
and help preserve your vision.
▼
To Operate the Auto-Dimming
Feature
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s
green LED indicator is on. The auto-
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger system continuously
for any longer than necessary.
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
305324
1
2
2
3
304867
1
B. 186 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
187
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
dimming feature will default to on with
each ignition cycle.
▼
To Operate the Compass Feature
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “ ” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive
the vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
Compass calibration zones
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
Find your current location and zone
number on the map.
Press and hold the “ ” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a zone
number appears in the display.
Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location zone
number appears. After you stop
pressing the switch, your new zone
number will be saved. Within a few
seconds, the display will show a
compass direction.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have
changed or if the compass appears inac-
curate, recalibrate the compass. Press
and hold the “ ” switch for more than 9
seconds or until a “C” appears in the
display. Once a “C” appears in the display,
slowly drive the vehicle in circles until
compass is calibrated.
▼
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up
to three hand-held radio frequency
remotes used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers,
entry door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. The below steps are
generic programming instructions; for
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
®
website. Additional information and
programming videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
304866
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CAUTION
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
Do not use HomeLink
®
with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object signaling the door to stop
and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
B. 187 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
188
▽ Programming a New HomeLink
®
button
1) Indicator Light
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink
®
button that you would like to program. The
HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash orange
slowly (if not, refer to "Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons" P191).
1) Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink
®
button that
you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you
have difficulty with the programming
process.
Turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” or “ACC” position before
programming and/or operating
HomeLink
®
.
Keep the hand-held remote
(garage door opener remote) of
the device you are programming
for use in other vehicles as well
as for future HomeLink
®
programming. It is also
suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes. Refer to
"Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons"
P191.
2
304868
1
304869
1
B. 188 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
189
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
3. While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the hand-
held remote button. Continue pressing the
hand-held remote button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release
the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to
replace this “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with proce-
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming” section.
Refer to "Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming" P190.
1) Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink
®
button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light remains
constant green, your device should
operate when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed. At this point, if your device
operates, programming is complete.
If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button up to three times to complete
the programming process. At this point
if your device operates, programming
is complete. If the device does not
operate, continue with the next step of
the programming instructions.
1) “Learn” button
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit (see the device’s manual
to identify this button). The name and
color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete
step 7.
304870 304871
1
304872
1
B. 189 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
190
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink
®
button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete and
your device should operate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and
released.
1) Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
"Garage Door Two-Way Communication"
P191.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
®
website.
▽ Gate Operator/Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out” (or
quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink
®
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same
manner. The indicator LED on the hand-
held remote will go off when the device
times out, indicating that it has finished
transmitting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
or garage door opener by using the
programming procedures, replace
“Programming a New HomeLink
®
button”
step 3 with the following:
While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release
(“cycle”) your device’s hand-held remote
every two seconds until the HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from orange to
green. You may now release the hand-
held remote button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to
unplug the device during the “cycling”
process to prevent possible overheat-
ing.
304873 304874
1
B. 190 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
191
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 4 to complete.
▽ Using HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button. Activa-
tion will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
▽ Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink
®
is now ready to be
programmed at any time beginning with
“Programming a New HomeLink
®
button”-
step 1.
▽ Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink
®
button can be released at this
point. Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button”- step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
▽ Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
HomeLink
®
has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink
®
can receive and display
“closing” or “opening” status messages
from compatible garage door opener
systems. At any time, HomeLink
®
can
also recall and display the last recorded
status communicated by the garage door
opener to indicate your garage door being
“closed” or “opened”.
HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
▽ Programming Two-Way
Communication
1) Status Indicators
Within 5 seconds after programming a
new HomeLink
®
button, both of
HomeLink’s garage door status indicators
will flash rapidly green indicating that the
garage door two-way communication has
been enabled. If your garage door status
indicators flashed, two-way communica-
tion programming is complete.
304874
1
B. 191 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
192
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink
®
information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
▽ Using Two-Way Communication
1) Status Indicator
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink
®
by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink
®
buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink
®
will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink
®
will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING
(Blinking Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING
(Blinking Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
▽ Certification
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at
1-800-355-3515.
U.S.-spec. models
304875
1
304876
12
34
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
B. 192 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
193
Instruments and Controls
3
– CONTINUED –
Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house
are registered trademarks of Gentex
Corporation.
306210
306210
306211
B. 193 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Mirrors
194
■ Outside Mirrors
▼ Remote control mirror switch
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
NOTE
The mirrors can also be adjusted man-
ually.
WARNING
When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or
damage.
Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these
features increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more informa-
tion, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.HomeLink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
306821
B. 194 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel
195
Instruments and Controls
3
3-17. Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Wheel
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
"Front Seats" P30.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
3-18. Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
2
3
1
306823
306824
B. 195 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 196 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Climate Control
4
Climate Control
4-1. Ventilator Control................................................198
Center Ventilators.........................................................198
Side Ventilators ............................................................198
4-2. Climate Control Panel.........................................198
4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation...............200
Sensors .........................................................................200
4-4. Manual Climate Control......................................201
Airflow Mode Selection................................................201
Temperature Control....................................................202
Fan Speed Control........................................................202
Air Conditioner Control................................................202
Air Inlet Selection .........................................................203
To Turn Off the Climate Control System ....................203
4-5. Defrosting ............................................................203
4-6. Operating Tips for Heater and Air
Conditioner........................................................204
Cleaning Ventilator Grille............................................ 204
Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight .... 204
Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant
Circuit ......................................................................... 204
Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer
Season........................................................................ 204
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and
Low Temperature Weather Condition...................... 205
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When
Engine Is Heavily Loaded ......................................... 205
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ........... 205
4-7. Air Filtration System ...........................................205
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter .................................... 206
B. 197 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Ventilator Control
198
4-1. Ventilator Control
■ Center Ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the center
grille open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to
the “ ” position.
■ Side Ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
4-2. Climate Control Panel
2
1
2
1
403482
2
1
403483
WARNING
The cooling function operates
only when the engine is running.
Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people
or animals.
B. 198 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Climate Control Panel
199
Climate Control
4
1
7
2 3 4 65
15 13 891011
12
14
403484
1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)
2) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
(Refer to "Temperature Control"
P202.)
3) Climate control mode indicator
4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to "Fan
Speed Control" P202.)
5) Temperature control dial (front
passenger’s side) (Refer to "Tempera-
ture Control" P202.)
6) Set temperature indicator (front
passenger’s side)
7) MAX A/C button (Refer to "MAX A/C
mode" P202.)
8) SYNC button (Refer to "SYNC mode"
P202.)
9) Air inlet selection button (Refer to "Air
Inlet Selection" P203.)
10) Air conditioner button (Refer to "Air
Conditioner Control" P202.)
11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
"Airflow Mode Selection" P201.)
12) Rear window defogger button and
outside mirror defogger button (if
equipped) (Refer to "Defogger"
P185.)
13) ON/OFF button (Refer to "To Turn Off
the Climate Control System" P203.)
14) Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting"
P203.)
15) AUTO button (Refer to "Automatic
Climate Control Operation" P200.)
B. 199 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Climate Control Operation
200
4-3. Automatic Climate
Control Operation
When this mode is selected, the fan
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control,
and air conditioner compressor operation
are automatically controlled. To activate
this mode, perform the following.
1. Press the AUTO button. The FULL
AUTO mode is selected and the “FULL
AUTO” indicator light on the display illumi-
nates.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
Operate the automatic climate
control system when the engine is
running.
Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the tempera-
ture is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates
The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
- When the cabin temperature is
low
- When the ambient temperature
decreases close to 32°F (0°C)
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the ON/
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO
mode operation, the “FULL” indicator
light on the control panel will turn off
and the “AUTO” indicator light will
remain illuminated. You can then
manually control the system as desired
using the button you operated. To
change the system back to the FULL
AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.
To turn off the climate control system,
press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
inlet selection will be set to the following.
When the air inlet selection is set to
auto mode: Outside air circulation
When the air inlet selection is set to
manual mode: No change
When the ignition switch is changed to the
“OFF” or “ACC” position from “ON”, the air
inlet mode will automatically change to the
outside air mode regardless of whether it
is the auto mode or manual mode.
■ Sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
1
2
403485
B. 200 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Manual Climate Control
201
Climate Control
4
– CONTINUED –
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions:
Do not subject the sensors to impact.
Keep water away from the sensors.
Do not cover the sensors.
4-4. Manual Climate Control
■ Airflow Mode Selection
Select the airflow mode using the airflow
mode selection button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
403486
403488
403487
B. 201 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Manual Climate Control
202
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
■ Temperature Control
Turn the temperature control dial to set
the preferred interior temperature.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
▼
MAX A/C mode
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C
button.
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed auto-
matically.
The air conditioner will turn on.
The temperature will be set on the
lowest.
The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
The air inlet will be set to the recircula-
tion mode.
The airflow mode setting will be set to
the ventilation mode.
To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the
previous setting, press the MAX A/C
button again.
▼
SYNC mode
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and front passenger’s side
temperatures are synchronized using the
driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator
will illuminate.
Press the SYNC button again or turn the
front passenger’s side temperature
control dial to cancel the SYNC mode.
The SYNC button indicator will not illumi-
nate. In this case, temperature control on
the driver’s side and front passenger’s
side is separated.
The temperature will be controlled individ-
ually using the driver’s and front
passenger’s temperature control dials.
■ Fan Speed Control
Select the preferred fan speed by turning
the fan speed control dial.
■ Air Conditioner Control
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air condi-
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, the
“A/C” indicator light illuminates.
403489
403490
B. 202 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Defrosting
203
Climate Control
4
– CONTINUED –
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. The indicator light will turn
off.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 32°F (0°C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
work properly.
■ Air Inlet Selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
Recirculation:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button illuminates, interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
in the following cases.
- When driving on a dusty road
- When you want cooling perfor-
mance to increase (for example, in
particularly hot weather)
Outside air circulation:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button does not illuminate,
outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment. Press the air inlet selection
button to the OFF position in the following
cases.
- When the road is no longer dusty
- When the interior has cooled to a
comfortable temperature
NOTE
When outside air circulation is
selected, the system may automati-
cally adjust the air inlet setting
depending on such factors as the tem-
perature setting, the temperature
inside the vehicle, or conditions out-
side the vehicle.
■ To Turn Off the Climate
Control System
To turn off the climate control system,
press the ON/OFF button.
4-5. Defrosting
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost
or dehumidify the windshield and the side
door windows.
NOTE
When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner
compressor operates automatically
regardless of the position of the air
conditioner button to defrost the wind-
shield more quickly. However, the indi-
cator on the air conditioner button may
not illuminate. At the same time, the air
inlet selection is automatically set to
the outside air circulation mode.
After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “ ”,
pressing the button again returns the
WARNING
Continued operation in the recircu-
lation mode may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the outside air
circulation mode as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
403491
B. 203 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner
204
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
vated.
4-6. Operating Tips for Heater
and Air Conditioner
■ Cleaning Ventilator Grille
1) Front ventilator inlet grille
2) Condenser
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept
clean because cooling performance is
impaired by any accumulation of insects
and leaves on the condenser.
■ Efficient Cooling after
Parking in Direct Sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
■ Lubrication Oil Circulation in
the Refrigerant Circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
■ Checking Air Conditioning
System before Summer
Season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrig-
erant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air condi-
tioning system checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
2
1
403492
B. 204 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Air Filtration System
205
Climate Control
4
– CONTINUED –
■ Cooling and Dehumidifying
in High Humidity and Low
Temperature Weather Condi-
tion
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.)
a small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
■ Air Conditioner Compressor
Shut-Off When Engine Is
Heavily Loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is
designed to temporarily shut off during air
conditioner operation whenever the accel-
erator is fully depressed such as during
rapid acceleration or when driving on a
steep upgrade.
■ Refrigerant for Your Climate
Control System
1) Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm the type of refrigerant is used in
your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
4-7. Air Filtration System
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
This schedule should be followed to main-
tain the filter’s dust collection ability.
Under extremely dusty conditions, the
filter should be replaced more frequently.
Have your filter checked or replaced by
your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,
use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
1
403493
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
B. 205 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Air Filtration System
206
■ Replacing the Cabin Air Filter
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
1) Link pocket
(2) Remove the link pocket from the
glove box.
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inward to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage the
hinge.
2. Remove the cabin air filter according
to the following procedure in order to
prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling
to the inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
1
403594
403495
403496
403497
B. 206 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Air Filtration System
207
Climate Control
4
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new
one and then reinstall the cover.
4. Reinstall the glove box in the reverse
order of removal.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
403498 403499
B. 207 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 208 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Antenna
210
5-1. Antenna
■ Roof Antenna
The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
5-2. Audio Set
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU audio system, refer to the sepa-
rate audio Owner’s Manual for details.
501618
B. 210 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Interior Equipment
6
Interior Equipment
6-1. Interior Light........................................................212
Map Lights.....................................................................212
OFF Delay Timer...........................................................212
6-2. Sun Visors ...........................................................213
Vanity Mirror with Light (If Equipped) ........................213
6-3. Storage Compartment ........................................213
Glove Box......................................................................214
Center Console.............................................................214
6-4. Bottle Holders .....................................................215
6-5. Accessory Power Outlets...................................215
6-6. USB Power Supply..............................................216
How to Use the USB Power Supply ........................... 217
6-7. Ashtray (Dealer Option)......................................217
6-8. Floor Mat ..............................................................218
6-9. Under-Floor Storage Compartment
(models with the flat tire repair kit) .................219
B. 211 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Interior Light
212
6-1. Interior Light
■ Map Lights
▼ Map light switches
To turn on the map light, press the lens.
To turn it off, press the lens again.
▼ Door interlock switch
1) Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following
positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be
turned on manually by pressing the map
light lens.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically when any of the doors (other
than the trunk lid) is opened even while
the map light is off. Several seconds after
all of the doors (other than the trunk lid)
are closed, the map lights gradually turn
off. For details, refer to "OFF Delay Timer"
P212.
■ OFF Delay Timer
The following lights have an automatic illu-
mination function.
Map lights
Trunk
When the interior light switch is set to the
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the
opening and closing of the doors, as well
as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in
which the lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details. Also, the setting can be
changed by operating the center infor-
mation display. For details, refer to
"Car settings" P165.
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
602244
1
602245
B. 212 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Sun Visors
213
Interior Equipment
6
– CONTINUED –
6-2. Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
■ Vanity Mirror with Light (If
Equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror
cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
6-3. Storage Compartment
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to
avoid being blinded by glare.
601182
602246
CAUTION
Keep the storage compartment
closed when it is not being used.
If left open, in the event of sudden
braking, etc., stowed items may
fly out, possibly leading to an
accident.
Do not store the following items
in the storage compartment.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
- Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items.
- Plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles
such as a lighter.
B. 213 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Storage Compartment
214
■ Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
■ Center Console
To open the center console, push on the
button lightly and it will automatically
open.
▼
Cup Holder and Console Tray
MT models
AT models
The cup holder and console tray is built
into the center console.
602247
602248
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Bever-
ages, if hot, might burn you and/
or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage
upholstery, carpets or audio
equipment.
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
Take care not to spill a beverage
on the select lever/shift lever or
any switch(es) in the adjacent
area. If the beverage is spilled, it
may cause a malfunction of the
select lever/shift lever and/or
switch(es).
602367
602249
B. 214 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Bottle Holders
215
Interior Equipment
6
– CONTINUED –
6-4. Bottle Holders
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
6-5. Accessory Power
Outlets
Power outlet in the glove box
Accessory power outlets are provided in
the glove box. Electrical power (12 V DC)
from the battery is available at any of the
outlets when the ignition switch is in either
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120 W.
CAUTION
Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
602250
602251
CAUTION
Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit.
Always put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated
wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120 W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
B. 215 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
USB Power Supply
216
6-6. USB Power Supply
NOTE
The rated voltage of each USB
terminal is 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A). For
details about the maximum rated
power, refer to "How to Use the USB
Power Supply" P217. Before
connecting a device, be sure to read
the instruction manual of the device
and check whether or not this specifi-
cation of the output is supported by the
device. If a device that requires power
exceeding the maximum rating is
connected, power supply or charging
may not be possible. Even if charging
could be completed, the time required
for charging may be longer than when
the genuine charger for that device is
used.
Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator and
brake pedals. If they do, do not
use the electrical appliance while
driving.
CAUTION
The specification of a USB
terminal that can be used is the A-
type. If a different specification of
terminal is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible, or the device may
malfunction.
There is a risk that a connected
device may malfunction or data
may be damaged. The connection
of a device shall be performed at
your responsibility.
To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not connect a USB hub.
- Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
- Do not spill water or other
liquid on the USB terminal.
Be careful not to pull the
connected cable. Doing so could
break the USB terminal and the
connected device.
If a device is connected for a long
time when the engine is not
running, doing so may cause the
risk of a discharged battery. Even
when the engine is running, we
recommend that you do not
connect a device for an unneces-
sarily long time.
Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause the
risk of smoke and fire.
B. 216 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Ashtray (Dealer Option)
217
Interior Equipment
6
– CONTINUED –
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible.
When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
■ How to Use the USB Power
Supply
Console USB power supply (an audio
device can be connected and used)
Use the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When using the USB, open the USB
power supply cover. After use, close it.
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the power can be supplied
to the electronic device. Up to 5 V/2.1 A
can be supplied from each terminal (total
of 4.2 A).
6-7. Ashtray (Dealer Option)
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
602252
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
B. 217 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Floor Mat
218
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to "Cup
Holder and Console Tray" P214. For the
locations of the bottle holders, refer to
"Bottle Holders" P215.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of
the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using
the ashtray to help reduce residual
smoke.
6-8. Floor Mat
1. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
601270
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could
cause an accident. Observe the fol-
lowing precautions to prevent the
floor mat from slipping forward.
Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
601534
Do not use more than one floor
mat.
601287
A
602368
B. 218 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Under-Floor Storage Compartment (models with the flat tire repair kit)
219
Interior Equipment
6
2. Turn the upper knob of each retaining
hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in
place.
A: Always align the “ ” marks.
6-9. Under-Floor Storage
Compartment (models with
the flat tire repair kit)
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk and
can be used to store small items. To open
the lid, pull the tab or handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the sub-
floor storage in the trunk.
CAUTION
Always keep the lid of the
subfloor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce the
risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
602253
Do not store spray cans,
containers with flammable or
corrosive liquids or any other
dangerous items in the subfloor
storage compartment.
B. 219 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 220 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Starting and Operating
7
Starting and Operating
7-1. Fuel.......................................................................223
Fuel Requirements .......................................................223
Fuel Filler Lid and Cap.................................................224
7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ...................227
7-3. Preparing to Drive...............................................228
7-4. Starting and Stopping Engine ...........................229
Safety Precautions .......................................................229
Operating Range for Push-Button Start System .......229
General Precautions When Starting Engine ..............229
Starting Engine.............................................................230
Stopping Engine ...........................................................232
When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly.......................................................................232
Steering Lock................................................................232
7-5. Manual Transmission .........................................233
Shifting Speeds ............................................................234
Driving Tips...................................................................235
7-6. Automatic Transmission ....................................236
Select Lever ..................................................................237
Adaptive Control...........................................................238
Shift Lock Function......................................................238
Selection of Manual Mode ...........................................239
Driving Tips...................................................................240
7-7. Driving Mode Select Switch (If Equipped) ........241
Normal Mode.................................................................241
Sport Mode....................................................................241
Snow Mode....................................................................241
Driving Mode Select Switch.........................................242
7-8. Active Sound Control .........................................242
7-9. Power Steering....................................................243
7-10. Braking...............................................................244
Braking Tips..................................................................244
Brake System ............................................................... 244
Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators ................. 245
7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)........................245
ABS Self-Check............................................................ 246
ABS Warning Light ...................................................... 246
7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
System ...............................................................246
EBD System Malfunctions .......................................... 246
7-13. Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC
System ...............................................................247
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) System..................... 247
TRAC System ............................................................... 247
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) System Monitor....... 249
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF Switch.............. 249
7-14. TRACK Mode .....................................................250
TRACK Mode................................................................ 250
Selecting TRAC Mode and Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) Mode ............................................................... 251
7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(If Equipped) ......................................................252
Certification for the Receiver...................................... 253
Certification for the Transmitter................................. 254
TPMS Screen................................................................ 254
Initializing the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..... 254
How to Initialize the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (If Equipped)................................................. 254
If You Press the Tire Pressure Monitoring Reset
Switch Accidentally................................................... 255
Initialization Procedure ............................................... 255
When Initialization of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System has Failed ..................................................... 255
Registering ID Codes .................................................. 255
A4600BEscusenvhch07.fm 221 ページ ２０２１年１１月１０日 水曜日 午後５時４３分
Starting and Operating
Changing the ID code set ............................................255
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle ........................................256
Parking Brake ............................................................... 256
Parking Tips..................................................................256
7-17. Hill Start Assist System....................................257
To Activate/Deactivate the Hill Start Assist
System ........................................................................259
Hill Start Assist Indicator Light...................................260
7-18. Cruise Control (Models without the
EyeSight system) ..............................................260
To Set Cruise Control .................................................. 260
To Temporarily Cancel the Cruise Control ................262
To Turn Off the Cruise Control ...................................262
To Change the Cruising Speed...................................262
Cruise Control Indicator Light .................................... 263
7-19. Rear View Camera.............................................263
How to Use the Rear View Camera.............................264
Viewing Range on the Screen.....................................265
Help Lines .....................................................................266
7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)...................................268
System Features ..........................................................268
System Operation.........................................................270
BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning
Buzzer .........................................................................272
BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator ............................................273
BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator .....................................274
To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA....................................274
Certification for the BSD/RCTA...................................275
Handling of Radar Sensors .........................................276
7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
(If Equipped) ..................................................... 277
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Overview .....................................................................278
Operating Conditions...................................................279
Sonar Audible Alarm....................................................282
Automatic Braking Operation .....................................284
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
System Operation ......................................................286
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
ON/OFF Setting ..........................................................286
RAB Warning Indicator ................................................287
Handling of the Sonar Sensors...................................287
B. 222 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuel
223
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
7-1. Fuel
■ Fuel Requirements
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher.
If unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no
detriment to engine durability or
driveability.
However, you may notice a slight
decrease in maximum engine perfor-
mance and you may hear some knocking
(pinging) from the engine while using 91
AKI (95 RON) fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95
RON) fuel will not affect your warranty
coverage.
▼
Fuel octane rating
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-
times knocks lightly when you drive up a
hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if
you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently.
▽ RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
▽ AKI
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
▼
Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
▼
Reformulated gasoline
SUBARU supports the use of reformu-
lated gasoline when available. Reformu-
lated gasoline has been blended to burn
more cleanly and reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
▼
MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-
enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light may turn on. If
this happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is deter-
mined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
▼
Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of gasoline with detergent addi-
tives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause damage
to the engine and/or fuel system.
Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 93 AKI (98 RON). Use of
those fuels are not recom-
mended.
B. 223 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuel
224
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% ethanol for the proper operation
of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from
any pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which
are only some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station oper-
ators if their gasolines contain detergents
and oxygenates and if they have been
reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi-
cient quantities of the proper cosolvent
and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
■ Fuel Filler Lid and Cap
▼ Locations of the fuel filler lid
▼
Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position and turn off all
the other electrical components.
2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
If the fuel filler lid is locked, perform one of
the operations below.
Press the “ ” button on the key fob.
702786
B. 224 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuel
225
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.
Open it further by hand.
1) Open
2) Close
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
WARNING
Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position first and then
close all vehicle doors and
windows. Make sure that there
are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the
adjacent area. Only handle fuel
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
1
2
702787
When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
are removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly
open the cap to prevent fuel from
spraying out and creating a fire
hazard.
702788
B. 225 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuel
226
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
7. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-
wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be
certain not to catch the tether under the
cap while tightening.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the
fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel
filler lid is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to "CHECK
ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction
Indicator Light" P136.
To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one
of the operations below. However if
these operations are performed when
the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler
lid will not lock when it is subsequently
closed.
- Press the “ ” button on the key
fob.
- Press the lock side of the power
door locking switch.
WARNING
When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the fuel
nozzle activates. If you continue
to add fuel, temperature changes
or other conditions may cause
fuel to overflow from the tank and
create a fire hazard.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be sure
to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause
damage to the fuel system.
After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that it
is fully tightened. If the cap is not
securely tightened, fuel may leak
out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system may
be damaged. It could also lead to
fuel spillage and a fire.
B. 226 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)
227
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
▼ If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to
a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the trunk.
1. Remove the access cover at the right-
side of the trunk trim.
1) Lever
2. Push the yellow lever to unlock the fuel
filler lid.
7-2. State Emission Testing
(U.S. Only)
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs
to inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed to
detect engine and transmission problems
that might cause the vehicle emissions to
exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspec-
tions apply to all 1996 model year and
newer passenger cars and trucks. Over
30 states plus the District of Columbia
Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine.
Continuing to operate your
vehicle at an extremely low fuel
level may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
702789
1
702790
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of the
state inspection program or its con-
tractors or licensees.
B. 227 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Preparing to Drive
228
have implemented emission inspection of
the OBDII system.
The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/
malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
A vehicle passes
the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is
observed, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
A vehicle fails
the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently
replaced or disconnected, the OBDII
system inspection may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for the emission test.
Under this condition, the vehicle driver
should be instructed to drive his/her
vehicle for a few days to reset the readi-
ness monitors and return for an emission
re-inspection.
Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
7-3. Preparing to Drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and trunk are fully
closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and
warning lights after starting the engine.
B. 228 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Starting and Stopping Engine
229
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
7-4. Starting and Stopping
Engine
■ Safety Precautions
Refer to "Safety Precautions" P94.
■ Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System
Refer to "Operating Range for Push-
Button Start System" P125.
■ General Precautions When
Starting Engine
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This
difficulty is caused by the electroni-
cally controlled throttle’s self-diag-
nosis function. To overcome it, keep
the ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
eration immediately after the engine
has started.
For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
CAUTION
Small animals trapped in the cool-
ing fan and belt of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
WARNING
Never start the engine from
outside the vehicle. It may result
in an accident.
Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide
poisoning.
Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable
substances. The exhaust pipe
and exhaust emissions can
create a fire hazard at high
temperatures.
CAUTION
If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may overheat
and burn.
When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat.
B. 229 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Starting and Stopping Engine
230
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up suffi-
ciently). In such a case, it is recom-
mended that you change to a different
brand of fuel.
On rare occasions, transient
knocking may be heard from the
engine when the accelerator is oper-
ated rapidly such as a rapid start-up
and a rapid acceleration. This is not a
malfunction.
The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
■ Starting Engine
NOTE
When pressing the push-button
ignition switch while depressing the
clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake
pedal (AT models):
- The engine starter operates for a
maximum of 10 seconds and after
starting the engine, the starter stops
automatically.
- The engine can be started
regardless of the power status.
If the engine does not start, check
the security indicator light. Then press
the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the clutch pedal
WARNING
There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in "General Precau-
tions When Starting Engine"
P229.
If the steering lock cannot be
released after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
If a system malfunction warning
message is displayed on the
combination meter, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
If a steering lock warning
message is displayed on the
combination meter after the
engine has started, it means that
the steering is still locked. While
moving the steering wheel right
and left, depress the brake pedal,
and press the push-button igni-
tion switch.
Do not continue pressing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop
pressing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the push-
button ignition switch without
depressing the clutch pedal (MT
models) or the brake pedal (AT
models) to switch the power
status to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds,
and then press the push-button
ignition switch to start the
engine.
B. 230 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Starting and Stopping Engine
231
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
(MT models) or the brake pedal (AT
models) to switch the power to “OFF”.
- If the light had illuminated, try to
start the engine again.
- If the light had been off, press the
push-button ignition switch while
depressing the clutch pedal (MT
models) or the brake pedal (AT
models) more forcefully.
The engine start procedures may
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, refer to "Starting Engine"
P326.
If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
Until the engine is warmed up suffi-
ciently, the engine speed will be main-
tained high. The engine speed will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Do not shift the select lever (AT
models) while the starter is cranking.
1) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the clutch pedal
(MT models) or the brake pedal (AT
models), the engine will start. The starting
procedure for the engine is as follows.
▼
MT models
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the shift lever to neutral.
4. Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal.
5. While depressing the clutch pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the shift lever to the neutral
position, and switch the power to
“ACC”. Depress the clutch pedal, and
press the push-button ignition switch
for at least 15 seconds. The engine
may start. Only use this engine start
procedure in case of emergency.
▼ AT models
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the
“P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
1
702836
B. 231 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Starting and Stopping Engine
232
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Press the push-
button ignition switch to start the
engine.
■ Stopping Engine
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the shift lever to neutral (MT
models) or select lever to the “P” position
(AT models).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
■ When Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob – If Access Key
Fob Does Not Operate Properly" P325.
■ Steering Lock
After stopping the engine and any door is
opened, the steering wheel will be locked
due to the steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
WARNING
Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows, the
engine will stop.
–The switch is pressed and held
for 2 seconds or longer.
–The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A
greater foot pressure will be
required on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an accident.
If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
For AT models:
Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
B. 232 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Manual Transmission
233
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
▼ When the steering lock cannot be
released
1) Push-button ignition switch
When you cannot restart the engine due
to the steering lock, check the status of
operation indicator and perform the
following steps.
▽ How to released steering lock
1. Check that the shift lever is set in
neutral (MT models) or select lever is set
in the “P” position (AT models).
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
▽ When the display of warning
messages
There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock function. Immediately
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-5. Manual Transmission
This manual transmission is a completely
synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-
reverse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
To change the shift lever position:
1. Depress the clutch pedal.
2. To shift into all positions other than
“R”, move the shift lever accordingly.
1
702836
702834
B. 233 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Manual Transmission
234
1) Slider
3. To shift into the “R” position, hold up
the slider, move the lever to the “R” posi-
tion, then release the slider.
4. Gradually release the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
■ Shifting Speeds
▼ Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel
economy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up at
the speeds listed in the following table.
▼
Gear shift indicator
1) Upshift indicator
2) Gear position indicator
The gear position indicator shows the
position of the shift lever.
When shifting up is recommended for
good fuel economy, the upshift indicator
blinks.
The gear shift indicator can be activated
or deactivated. The default setting is
deactivated. For details, refer to "Settings
Display" P157.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral posi-
tion. Engine braking has no effect
in either of these conditions and
the risk of an accident is conse-
quently increased.
1
702835
Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal)
suddenly when starting the
vehicle. By doing so the vehicle
might unexpectedly accelerate or
the transmission could malfunc-
tion.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped.
It may cause damage to the trans-
mission to try shifting into
reverse when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not shift the shift lever without
depressing the clutch pedal.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 12 (19) to 14 (22)
2nd to 3rd 18 (29) to 23 (37)
3rd to 4th 22 (35) to 34 (54)
4th to 5th 27 (43) to 43 (69)
5th to 6th 35 (56) to 52 (83)
Shift up mph (km/h)
1
2
702767
B. 234 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Manual Transmission
235
Starting and Operating
7
▼ Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each
different gear. The pointer of the tachom-
eter will enter the red area if these speeds
are exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, do not drive the
vehicle with the pointer of the tachometer
inside the red area. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to excessive engine
wear and poor fuel economy.
NOTE
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
■ Driving Tips
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
Gear mph (km/h)
1st 28 (45)
2nd 47 (75)
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum
Allowable Speed for the gear which
is about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
B. 235 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Transmission
236
7-6. Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission is electroni-
cally controlled and provides 6 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a
manual mode.
NOTE
When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
shift at higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is suffi-
ciently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the trans-
mission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
Place the shift boot to the original
position after it is lifted. If the shift lever
is operated with the shift boot in the
rolled up position, the shift boot may
have tension and it may disturb the
shift lever operation.
When the vehicle is idling at high
rpm in order to warm up, and the
vehicle is on a slippery road, the trans-
mission may automatically shift to 2nd
gear for stopping and starting off.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle to
lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to observe these
precautions could cause damage
to the transmission.
- Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-
tion only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
- Do not shift from the “D” posi-
tion into the “R” position or
vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the transmission
fluid to overheat.
Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set in
the “R” position. Doing so may
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
B. 236 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Transmission
237
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
■ Select Lever
: Shift with the brake pedal depressed
and push-button ignition switch in the “ON”
position. When shifting between “P” and “D”,
depress the brake pedal and securely stop
the vehicle before shifting.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
engine is controlled so that the engine
speed may not become too high even
if the accelerator pedal is depressed
hard.
▼ P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P” posi-
tion. Do not hold the vehicle with only the
mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
▼
R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position.
▼
N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
▼
D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically into a
suitable gear according to the vehicle
speed and the acceleration you require.
Also, while driving up and down a hill, the
transmission assists and controls the
driving performance and engine braking
while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
When you release the pedal, the transmis-
sion will return to the original gear posi-
tion.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
If one of the shift paddles behind the
steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
temporarily switch to the manual mode. In
this mode, you can shift into any gear
702768
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently
increased.
B. 237 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Transmission
238
position using the shift paddles. For
details about the manual mode, refer to
"Selection of Manual Mode" P239.
Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the
transmission will switch from the manual
mode back to the “D” position for normal
driving.
▽ While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and
downshifting resulting in a smoother oper-
ation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift,
depending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
■ Adaptive Control
In order to realize smoother driving while
driving in “D” position, an appropriate gear
is automatically selected by limiting
upshifting and performing downshifting
operations according to driver operations
and driving conditions.
When driving uphill, prevents unneces-
sary upshifting and downshifting.
When driving downhill, downshifting is
performed at engine speeds higher than
usual.
When driving on curves, prevents
upshifting even when accelerating.
When the brake pedal is depressed
firmly, downshifting is automatically
performed, fully utilizing engine braking.
When the accelerator pedal is
suddenly released, prevents upshifting.
NOTE
Adaptive control operates automati-
cally when the select lever is in the “D”
position. The function is canceled
when the paddle shift levers are oper-
ated or the select lever is shifted to the
“M” position.
■ Shift Lock Function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
“OFF” position.
▼
Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON” posi-
tion then move the select lever to the “P”
position with the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
"Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion" P239.
B. 238 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Transmission
239
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
▼ Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion
Perform the following procedure to
release the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Using a flathead screwdriver, remove
the cover. To prevent damage to the
vehicle, wrap the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with a rag, etc.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release portion using the
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion as soon as possible.
■ Selection of Manual Mode
▼ Selecting gears in manual mode
Shift the select lever to the “M” position to
change to manual mode.
When the upshift/downshift indicators are
illuminated, the vehicle can be driven in a
selected gear by shifting the select lever
toward “-” or “+” or operating the “-” or “+”
shift paddle.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Upshift
4) Downshift
702769
702770
1
3
4
2
34
702773
B. 239 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Automatic Transmission
240
The gear changes once each time the
select lever or a shift paddle is operated.
The selected gear, from “M1” to “M6”, will
be displayed on the combination meter.
When in manual mode, the gear will not
change unless the select lever or a shift
paddle is operated, except in the following
situations.
When the vehicle speed drops
(downshift only)
When the engine oil temperature is
high and the engine speed approaches
close to the red zone
If an upshift is attempted while the vehicle
speed is low, the gear will not be changed.
NOTE
If a downshift is attempted at a
vehicle speed where a downshift is not
possible (when the engine speed
would enter the red zone if a downshift
is performed), the downshift warning
buzzer will sound to inform the driver
that a downshift cannot be performed.
You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illumi-
nate. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and let the engine idle until
the warning light turns off.
▼
Temporary manual mode driving
While driving with the select lever in “D”, if
a shift paddle is operated, the gear can
temporarily be selected. In this case, “M”
and the selected gear number will be
displayed on the combination meter. (If
the engine speed approaches close to the
red zone, an upshift will automatically be
performed.)
1) Upshift
2) Downshift
The selected gear, from “M1” to “M6”, will
be displayed on the combination meter.
NOTE
In the following situations, tempo-
rary manual mode will be cancelled.
- When the vehicle speed is low
- When the accelerator pedal is
depressed continuously for a
certain amount of time or more
- When the accelerator pedal is
depressed heavily
- When the select lever is shifted
to a position other than “D”
- When the “+” shift paddle switch
is held down for a period of time
When a downshift is attempted at a
vehicle speed where a downshift is not
possible (when the engine speed
would enter the red zone if a downshift
is performed), the downshift warning
buzzer will sound to inform the driver
that a downshift cannot be performed.
■ Driving Tips
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on
the shift paddles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting.
12
702766
B. 240 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Driving Mode Select Switch (If Equipped)
241
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
gravel covered road), you can start off
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting Snow mode.
Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not hold
the vehicle with only the transmission.
Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
7-7. Driving Mode Select
Switch (If Equipped)
By pressing the driving mode select
switch the following modes can be
selected to suit driving and usage condi-
tions:
■ Normal Mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel
economy, quietness, and dynamic perfor-
mance. Suitable for normal driving.
■ Sport Mode
The Sport mode indicator light comes on.
Use Sport mode for sporty driving or when
driving in mountainous regions with lots of
curves.
If the mode is changed to Sport mode
while driving with the select lever in the “D”
position, the selected gear, from “D1” to
“D6”, will be displayed on the meter.
NOTE
In Sport mode, lower gears are used
and gears change at a higher engine
speed.
Sport mode cannot be changed to
when driving with adaptive cruise
control/cruise control activated.
While the engine is cool, you cannot
change to Sport mode.
If tire slip is detected on a slippery
road surface while in Sport mode,
Sport mode may be cancelled.
■ Snow Mode
The Snow mode indicator light comes on.
702776
702777
B. 241 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Active Sound Control
242
Use Snow mode for accelerating and
driving on slippery road surfaces such as
snow.
NOTE
To prevent slipping, 1st gear cannot be
selected when in Snow mode.
■ Driving Mode Select Switch
To select the Sport mode, press the
Sport switch.
To select the Snow mode, press the
Snow switch.
To cancel Sport mode or Snow mode,
press the same side of the switch again.
NOTE
In the following situations, the driving
mode is automatically deactivated:
When the engine is turned off after
driving in Sport mode or Snow mode.
When adaptive cruise control/cruise
control is activated while driving in
Sport mode.
If a malfunction occurs in the engine
or automatic transmission electrical
control system while Sport mode or
Snow mode is selected
When the idling speed is high during
warm-up or when the road surface is
slippery and stopping/starting off is
automatically performed in second
gear
7-8. Active Sound Control
The active sound control provides
dynamic engine sounds. When driving
with Sport mode selected, the engine
sounds will be particularly loud.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational set-
ting of the Active Sound Control can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details.
702775
B. 242 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Power Steering
243
Starting and Operating
7
7-9. Power Steering
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the combi-
nation meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is func-
tioning properly. Then, if the engine
started, the warning light turns off to
inform the driver that the steering power
assist is operational.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent
the system components, such as the
control computer and drive motor,
from overheating.
The steering wheel is operated
frequently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently
turning the steering wheel during
parallel parking.
The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes
power assist limitation to occur too
frequently, this may result in a mal-
function of the power steering control
system.
702778
CAUTION
While the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
B. 243 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Braking
244
7-10. Braking
■ Braking Tips
▼ When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the
vehicle at a safe speed while lightly
depressing the brake pedal to heat up the
brakes.
▼
Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When
descending a grade, if only the foot brake
is used, the brakes may start working
improperly because of brake fluid over-
heating, caused by overheated brake
pads. To help prevent this, shift into a
lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
▼ Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
■ Brake System
▼ Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
▼
Brake booster
The brake booster uses vacuum pump
system to assist braking force. Do not turn
off the engine while driving because that
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in
poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking
distance will increase.
▼
Supplemental booster function
when vacuum pressure fails
While the ignition switch is turned “ON”
and the engine is running, the supple-
mental booster function operates when
the brake booster performance is
decreased due to insufficient vacuum
boost.
When the brake pedal is depressed while
the supplemental booster function is oper-
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
vibration may be generated. This is not a
malfunction.
▼
Brake assist system
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads.
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
B. 244 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
245
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
■ Disc Brake Pad Wear
Warning Indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, imme-
diately have your vehicle inspected by the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake
pedal strongly to bring the effect of
the brake assist.
700040
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with an ABS equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a seri-
ous accident.
CAUTION
The ABS does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over newly fallen snow, stopping
distances may be longer for a
vehicle with the ABS than one
without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore,
reduce your speed and leave
ample distance from other vehi-
cles.
B. 245 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System
246
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when
the ABS operates.
■ ABS Self-Check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate
any abnormal condition.
■ ABS Warning Light
Refer to "ABS Warning Light" P140.
7-12. Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
■ EBD System Malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the
following warning lights illuminate simulta-
neously.
Brake system warning light
ABS warning light
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
warning light
If the both warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately
and contact an SUBARU dealer.
When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since doing
so may defeat the operation of the
ABS.
702779
B. 246 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC System
247
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
7-13. Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC)/TRAC System
■ Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) System
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) operation indicator light.
NOTE
In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system may therefore
operate. Such operation does not indi-
cate a system malfunction.
- On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
- On unfinished roads
- When the vehicle is towing a
trailer
- When the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
Activation of the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system will cause opera-
tion of the steering wheel to feel
slightly different compared to that for
normal conditions.
It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) system.
Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system unable to operate
correctly.
■ TRAC System
The TRAC system is designed to prevent
spinning of the driving wheels on slippery
road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain
traction and directional control. Activation
of this function is indicated by flashing of
the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) opera-
tion indicator light. The TRAC system is
also equipped with the brake LSD func-
tion.
WARNING
Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
B. 247 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC System
248
NOTE
The Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system and TRAC system may be con-
sidered normal when the following
conditions occur.
Slight twitching of the brake pedal is
felt.
WARNING
Directional control and power
may not be achievable while
driving on slippery road surfaces,
even if the TRAC system is oper-
ating. Do not drive the vehicle in
conditions where stability and
power may be lost.
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence
because you are driving with a
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system and TRAC system
equipped vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system and TRAC system,
winter tires should be used when
driving on snow-covered or icy
roads; in addition, vehicle speed
should be reduced considerably.
Simply having a Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system and TRAC
system does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
Activation of the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system and TRAC
system is an indication that the
road being travelled on has a slip-
pery surface; since having
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
and TRAC is no guarantee that
full vehicle control will be main-
tained at all times and under all
conditions, its activation should
be seen as a sign that the speed
of the vehicle should be reduced
considerably.
Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) system
and TRAC system, have an
inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system and TRAC system
is operating properly.
- All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
- Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the driver’s
side center pillar.
- When replacing a flat tire, use
only the specified temporary
spare tire. However, even with
the specified temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
system and TRAC system will
be reduced.
If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system and TRAC system
may not operate correctly.
B. 248 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC System
249
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
An operating noise from the engine
compartment is heard briefly when
starting the engine and when driving
off after starting the engine.
The brake pedal seems to jolt when
driving off after starting the engine.
■ Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) System Monitor
Refer to "Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
Warning Light/Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) Operation Indicator Light" P142
and "Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF
Indicator Light" P143.
■ Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) OFF Switch
▼ Disabling the TRAC System
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or
snow, the TRAC system may reduce
power from the engine to the wheels.
Pressing “ ” to turn the system off
may make it easier for you to rock the
vehicle in order to free it. In this case, the
brake LSD function remains on. To turn
the TRAC system off, quickly press and
release the button. The TRAC OFF indi-
cator light will come on. Press the button
again to turn the system back on.
Press the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
OFF switch to deactivate the TRAC
system. Creating adequate driving wheel
slip by deactivating the TRAC system may
help to recover from the loss of traction.
Use the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
OFF switch as necessary.
A standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
▼
Turning Off both Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) and TRAC Systems
To turn the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
systems and TRAC system off, press and
hold “ ” for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped. The TRAC
OFF indicator light and the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) OFF indicator light
will come on. However, on vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the brake LSD
function will remain on. Press the button
again to turn the systems back on. With
the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) system
and TRAC system deactivated, traction
and stability enhancement offered by
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) system
and TRAC system is unavailable. There-
fore you should not deactivate the Vehicle
702785 702831
B. 249 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
TRACK Mode
250
Stability Control (VSC) system and TRAC
system except under above-mentioned
situations.
NOTE
When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system and TRAC
system, the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system and TRAC system auto-
matically reactivates itself the next
time the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position and the engine is
restarted.
If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system is activated, and the
system ignores any further pressing of
the switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position and restart the engine.
When the switch is pressed to deac-
tivate the Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) system and TRAC system, the
vehicle’s running performance is
comparable with that of a vehicle that
does not have a Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system and TRAC
system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) system and
TRAC system except when absolutely
necessary.
Even when the TRAC system is
deactivated, components of the brake
control system may still activate. When
the brake control system is activated,
the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
operation indicator light flashes.
7-14. TRACK Mode
■ TRACK Mode
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of
control modes to accommodate various
driving preferences. The control modes
can be selected with the TRACK switch.
Normal mode allows secure and smooth
normal driving. When the switch is
pressed and held for 1 second or more,
TRACK mode is activated. Control char-
acteristics such as the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) and TRAC are adjusted to
afford maneuverability closer to what a
driver may desire, while a sense of secu-
rity is retained.
▼
TRACK mode/Normal mode
702840
B. 250 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
TRACK Mode
251
Starting and Operating
7
The TRACK indicator and Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) OFF indicator come on
when in TRACK mode.
To change back to normal mode while in
TRACK mode, press Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) OFF switch or the TRACK
switch.
■ Selecting TRAC Mode and Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) Mode
Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows:
NOTE
When the ignition switch is turned “OFF” position after driving in TRACK mode,
the mode is automatically deactivated.
Driving con-
ditions
TRAC modes
Vehicle Sta-
bility Control
(VSC) modes
Brake LSD
function
Indicator lights
Normal roads Normal mode Normal mode Normal mode ―
Rough roads Off Normal mode Normal mode
Sport driving
TRACK mode TRACK mode TRACK mode
Off Off
TRACK mode
(AT models)
Off (MT mod-
els)
B. 251 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
252
7-15. Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) (If
Equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with a warning
message by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
702780
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and
serious personal injury could
occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all
four tires and adjust the pres-
sure to the COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the tire
inflation pressure label on the
center pillar on the driver’s
side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures
increase accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly
before adjusting their pressures
to the standard values shown on
the tire inflation pressure label.
Refer to "Tires and Wheels"
P358. The tire pressure moni-
toring system does not function
when the vehicle is stationary.
After adjusting the tire pressures,
increase the vehicle speed to at
least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the
TPMS rechecking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pres-
sures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low
tire pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as pos-
sible.
B. 252 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
253
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
■ Certification for the Receiver
FCC ID: HYQ23ABG
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or
system resetting.
When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid
sealant is used, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer or other
qualified service shop as soon as
possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter when replacing
the tire. You may reuse the wheel
if there is no damage to it and if
the sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approx-
imately one minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function
properly.
B. 253 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
254
■ Certification for the Trans-
mitter
U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: PAXPMVE000
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Mexico-spec. models
MEX: RLVPAPM17-1337
■ TPMS Screen
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to "Drive Information" P153.
■ Initializing the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
When setting the tire inflation pressure
above the specified level, initialize the tire
pressure monitoring system.
When the tire pressure monitoring system
is initialized, the current tire inflation pres-
sure is set as the standard pressure.
■ How to Initialize the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(If Equipped)
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
Initialization cannot be performed while
the vehicle is moving.
2. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the
specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
Refer to "Tires" P385.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to
the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. The tire pressure monitoring system
will operate based on this pressure level.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
702781
702838
B. 254 ページ ２０２１年１１月４日 曜日 午９時４４分
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
255
Starting and Operating
7
4. Press and hold the TPMS set switch
until the low tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly 3 times.
■ If You Press the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Reset
Switch Accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure monitoring
system again.
■ Initialization Procedure
Make sure to carry out initialization
after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before
carrying out initialization or tire inflation
pressure adjustment.
If you have accidentally turned the igni-
tion switch to the “OFF” position during
initialization, it is not necessary to press
the TPMS set switch again as initialization
will restart automatically when the engine
is restarted.
If you accidentally press the TPMS set
switch when initialization is not necessary,
adjust the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level when the tires are cold, and
conduct initialization again.
■ When Initialization of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
has Failed
Initialization can be completed in a few
minutes. However, in the following case,
the settings have not been recorded and
the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation
pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
When operating the TPMS set switch,
low tire pressure warning light does not
blink 3 times.
After carrying out the initialization
procedure, the low tire pressure warning
light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after
driving for 20 minutes.
■ Registering ID Codes
Every tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter has a unique ID code. In addi-
tion to the set of tire pressure warning
system sensor ID codes initially registered
to the vehicle, a second set of ID codes
can be registered.
A second set of tire pressure warning
system sensor ID codes can be registered
at your SUBARU dealer. When 2 sets of
ID codes have been registered, either ID
code set can be selected.
■ Changing the ID code set
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion.
2. Press the TPMS set switch 3 times
within 3 seconds.
3. The low tire pressure warning light will
illuminate for 3 seconds and then blink 3
times.
4. The low tire pressure warning light will
blink for 1 minute and then illuminate.
5. When the ID code change has
completed, the tire pressure monitoring
light will turn off.
Check that tire pressures are displayed on
the TPMS screen.
WARNING
Do not operate the TPMS set switch
without first adjusting the tire infla-
tion pressure to the specified level.
Otherwise, the low tire pressure
warning light may not come on even
if the tire inflation pressure is low,
or it may come on when the tire
inflation pressure is actually nor-
mal.
B. 255 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Parking Your Vehicle
256
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle
■ Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
To release the parking brake, pull the
lever up slightly, press the release button,
then lower the lever while keeping the
button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting the
vehicle, be sure that the warning light has
turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to "Brake System Warning Light"
P140.
■ Parking Tips
When parking your vehicle, always
perform the following items.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
For AT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
Never rely on the mechanical friction of
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
WARNING
Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent oper-
ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot
or sunny days, the temperature in
a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people.
Do not park the vehicle over flam-
mable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust
system parts.
Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passenger
compartment, occupants in the
vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking
brake is set because this will
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been fully
released.
702782
The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is needed
(e.g., when parking on a steep
slope while towing a trailer).
700897
B. 256 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Hill Start Assist System
257
Starting and Operating
7
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
7-17. Hill Start Assist System
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
easier.
1) Starting forward facing uphill
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and AT
models)
B) Clutch
pedal (MT models only)
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), pay attention to blocks
and other obstructions on the
ground when parking. The under-
spoilers could be damaged by con-
tact with them.
700898
WARNING
The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope,
be sure to firmly set the parking
brake. When setting the parking
brake, make sure that the vehicle
remains stationary when the
clutch pedal (MT models) and
brake pedal (both MT and AT
models) are released.
Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position while the Hill
start assist system is operating.
The Hill start assist system will be
deactivated and may lead to an
accident.
1
2
BA
701116
B. 257 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
– CONTINUED –
Hill Start Assist System
258
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following
conditions.
The clutch pedal is depressed while the
brake pedal is also depressed (MT
models).
The vehicle has stopped with the brake
pedal depressed (AT models).
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the clutch pedal
(MT models only) and accelerator pedal
(all models).
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
When starting backward facing uphill
When starting forward facing downhill
While the parking brake is applied
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “OFF” position
While the Hill start assist indicator light
is illuminated. Refer to "Hill Start Assist
Indicator Light" P150.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
for MT models, this braking effect should
disappear once the clutch pedal is
released.
NOTE
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehi-
cle begins to move forward after being
reversed.
701109
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).
B. 258 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Hill Start Assist System
259
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
■ To Activate/Deactivate the
Hill Start Assist System
Hill start assist indicator light
To activate or deactivate the Hill start
assist system, perform the following
steps.
NOTE
If you make an error when performing
any steps in the following procedure,
place the ignition switch in the “OFF”
position once and then start over
again.
▼ To deactivate
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Confirm the following items.
(1) The ABS warning light turns off.
(2) The brake system warning light
illuminates.
(3) The Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) OFF indicator light turns off.
(4) TRAC OFF indicator light turns off.
5. Press and hold the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) OFF switch for 30 seconds
until the Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
OFF indicator light on the combi-
nation meter turns on and off.
6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) OFF switch.
7. Within 2 seconds, press back the
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF
switch.
The Hill start assist indicator light turns on
and off.
CAUTION
When starting on an up hill grade,
make sure the Hill start assist indi-
cator light is on.
If the Hill start assist indicator light
is off, make sure the parking brake
is applied.
702783
1
4
23
702784
702785
B. 259 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cruise Control (Models without the EyeSight system)
260
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position. Hill start assist is deactivated.
NOTE
When the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist indica-
tor light turns off.
▼
To reactivate
To reactivate Hill start assist system,
repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist indicator light illuminates.
■ Hill Start Assist Indicator
Light
Refer to "Hill Start Assist Indicator Light"
P150.
7-18. Cruise Control (Models
without the EyeSight system)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 20
mph (30 km/h) or more.
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally set-
ting of the cruise control.
■ To Set Cruise Control
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control
under any of the following condi-
tions. These may cause loss of
vehicle control.
- In heavy traffic
- On roads with sharp bends
- On winding roads
- On slippery roads, such as
those covered with rain, ice or
snow
- On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down
a steep hill.
- During emergency towing
When using the cruise control,
always set the speed appropri-
ately according to the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions, and
other conditions.
702791
B. 260 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cruise Control (Models without the EyeSight system)
261
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
Cruise control main button
1. After the engine has started, press the
“ON-OFF” switch of the cruise control
switch.
Cruise control indicator light
The cruise control indicator light (white) on
the combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Press the Cruise control switch to the
“-SET” side and release it.
NOTE
When setting a cruise speed for the
first time during a drive, both “-SET”
and “+RES” may be used to set the ini-
tial cruise speed.
Cruise control indicator light
1) When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”
2) When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”
At this time, the cruise control indicator
light (green) is illuminated in the combina-
tion meter. The set speed will be shown on
the combination meter. You can change
the displayed units by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to "Combination Meter Settings"
P130.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily
increased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the
702792
702793
1
2
702876
B. 261 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cruise Control (Models without the EyeSight system)
262
vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
■ To Temporarily Cancel the
Cruise Control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
Pulling the cruise control switch.
Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal.
When the cruise control is cancelled, the
cruise control indicator light in the combi-
nation meter will change from green to
white.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with
vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or more, push the lever up to
return to the original cruising speed auto-
matically.
At this time, the cruise control indicator
light in the combination meter will change
from white to green.
■ To Turn Off the Cruise
Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
Press the “ON-OFF” switch of the
cruise control switch again.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“OFF” position (but only when the vehicle
is completely stopped).
■ To Change the Cruising
Speed
▼ To increase the speed (by the
cruise control switch)
Press the cruise control switch to the
“+RES” side and hold it until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. Then, release
the switch. The vehicle speed at that
moment will be memorized and treated as
the new set speed.
When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the
cruise control switch to the “+RES” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
702795
702796
702796
B. 262 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear View Camera
263
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
(0.6 mph) each time by pressing the
cruise control switch to the “+RES” side.
▼
To increase the speed (by acceler-
ator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the cruise control switch to the “-
SET” side once. Now the desired speed is
set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
▼
To decrease the speed (by the
cruise control switch)
Press the cruise control switch to the “-
SET” side and hold it until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. Then, release
the switch. The vehicle speed at that
moment will be memorized and treated as
the new set speed.
When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the
cruise control switch to the “-SET” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
(0.6 mph) each time by pressing the
cruise control switch to the “-SET” side.
▼
To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the cruise control
switch to the “-SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Cruise Control Indicator
Light
Refer to "Combination Meter Settings"
P130.
7-19. Rear View Camera
A rear view camera is attached to the
trunk lid. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position and the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT models) is set
to “R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image behind the
vehicle on the center information display.
702793
WARNING
Since the rear view camera uses a
wide-angle lens, the image on the
monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
702799
B. 263 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear View Camera
264
NOTE
Do not wipe the camera with
alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.
Otherwise, discoloration may occur.
To remove contamination, wipe the
camera with a cloth moistened with a
diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it
with a soft, dry cloth.
When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However,
when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens, be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate.
Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines around
the light source. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
Under the fluorescent light, the
display may flicker. However, this is
not a malfunction.
The image of the rear view camera
may be slightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
If there is a malfunction on the
center information display, refer to
"Malfunctions of the Center Informa-
tion Display"
P327.
■ How to Use the Rear View
Camera
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
“R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, always
check the rear view and the
surrounding area with your eyes
and mirrors, and move backward
at a slow speed. Moving back-
ward only by checking the rear
view image from the camera
could cause an accident.
Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell a
strange odor, stop using the rear
view camera immediately.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
When washing your vehicle with
a high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to touch the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in
condensation, malfunction, fire
or electric shock.
Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful when removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a fire or electric shock.
Pour water or lukewarm water
over the camera to remove mud
and ice, and wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise,
damage or fire may occur.
When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
If you use the rear view camera
for a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
B. 264 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear View Camera
265
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
NOTE
The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle inside mirror or the
outside mirror.
When “Rear Camera Delay Control”
is on, the rear view image from the rear
view camera will be displayed on the
center information display for a certain
amount of time after the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (AT models) is
shifted from “R” to another position.
When any of the following conditions
are met, the rear view image will be
canceled:
- The select lever is shifted to “P”
(AT models)
- The vehicle speed becomes
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more
- The parking brake is engaged
- 9 seconds have elapsed since
the shift lever (MT models) or select
lever (AT models) was shifted from
“R” to another position
To turn the function on and off, refer to
"General settings"
P161.
It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
- The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
- The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
- An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
- Strong light is shining directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
■ Viewing Range on the Screen
Range of view
Range of view
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may
cause an accident or injury.
601498
601499
B. 265 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear View Camera
266
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
■ Help Lines
The help lines are a guide to help you
realize the actual distance from the screen
image.
NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range within sev-
eral seconds after turning on the igni-
tion switch, the warning message may
not be displayed. Wait for several sec-
onds after turning on the ignition
switch before shifting to the “R”
range. Then, the warning message will
be displayed.
Help lines
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
7) Dynamic guidelines
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
“R”, the monitor screen displays the help
lines together with the rear view image.
601103
601500
601105
702392
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
Check Surroundings Before Backing Up
B. 266 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Rear View Camera
267
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
When “Steering Angle Lines” is off,
the dynamic guidelines will be disap-
pear on the center information display.
To turn the dynamic guidelines on and
off, refer to "General settings" P161.
▼
Difference between screen image
and actual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
▽ When there is an upward slope
at the back
1) 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
▽ When there is a downward slope
at the back
1) 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
CAUTION
When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
Otherwise, it may cause an acci-
dent or injury.
The actual position may be
different from the indication of
the help lines.
Differences may occur due to the
number of passengers or the
loaded cargo.
When the vehicle is on a slope or
inclined against the road, the
indication is different from the
actual position.
601501
1
601502
1
B. 267 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
268
▼ Feature of distance marker
1) 3 ft (1 m) line
2) 10 ft (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or another
object close behind, distance cannot be
correctly displayed.
7-20. BSD/RCTA (If
Equipped)
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner
radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles
to the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
■ System Features
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection)
To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
601673
2
1
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist
the driver in changing lanes or
reversing safely by monitoring the
rear and side areas of the vehicle.
However, you cannot rely on this
system alone in assuring the safety
during a lane change or reversing.
Overconfidence in this system
could result in an accident and lead
to serious injury or death. Since the
system operation has various lim-
itations, the flashing or illumination
of the BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light may be delayed or it may
not operate at all even when a vehi-
cle is present in a neighboring lane
or approaching from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
B. 268 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
269
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries, Canada and Mexico. When
driving in other countries, certifica-
tion of the country where the vehicle is
driven must be obtained. For certifica-
tion in the U.S. and other FCC compli-
ant countries, Canada and Mexico,
refer to "Certification for the BSD/
RCTA" P275.
▼
Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the pres-
ence of vehicles in its blind spot.
If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by illumi-
nating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-
nating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light.
▽ Lane Change Assist (LCA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the neigh-
boring lanes.
If the system detects a vehicle
approaching at a high speed in the neigh-
boring lanes, it warns the driver of
dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light(s) on the outside
mirror(s).
If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-
nating, the system warns the driver of
dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light.
▼
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
701459
1
701406
1
701460
1
B. 269 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
270
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle
approaching from either side while moving
backward, it warns the driver of dangers in
the following way.
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
A warning buzzer sounds.
An icon appears on the center informa-
tion display.
▽ Limitations of the detectability
of RCTA
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
Example 1
1) The detection range of the radar
sensors
2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle
Example 2
1) The detection range of the radar
sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
reversing the vehicle.
■ System Operation
▼ Operating conditions
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of
the following conditions are met.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
The vehicle is driven at speeds above
7 mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
position (RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
appears.
The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
701818
2
A
B
1
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked vehi-
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
reversing the vehicle.
701819
1
C
B. 270 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
271
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
- When a malfunction occurs in
the system, including the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light
If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution. For
details, refer to "BSD/RCTA Warning
Indicator" P274.
In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
- When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the orien-
tation of the radar sensor is shifted
for any reason, readjustment is
required. Have the sensor adjusted
at a SUBARU dealer.)
- When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper surface
around the radar sensors
- When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an environ-
ment in which there are no objects
around (such as in a desert) for a
prolonged period of time
- When the temperature around
the radar sensors increases exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in the summer, etc.
- When the temperature around
the radar sensors becomes
extremely low
- When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
- When the vehicle voltage
exceeds the battery voltage rating
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation
once these conditions are corrected,
and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will
disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA
OFF indicator appears for a prolonged
period of time, have the system
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
The detectability of the radar
sensors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA
detection may be impaired and the
system may not operate properly
under the following conditions.
- When the rear bumper around
the radar sensors is distorted
- When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
- When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on the
rear bumper
- During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
- When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and through
puddles
The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the
following vehicles and objects.
- Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, stationary objects on
the road or road side, etc.
- Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with lower body height such as a
trailer with no cargo and sports
cars)
- Vehicles that are not
approaching your vehicle even
though they are in the detection area
(either on a neighboring lane to the
rear or beside your vehicle when
reversing) (The system determines
the presence of approaching vehi-
cles based on data detected by the
radar sensors.)
- Vehicles traveling at signifi-
cantly different speeds
- Vehicles driving in parallel at
almost the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
- Oncoming vehicles
- Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
- Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
B. 271 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
272
driving in a lane next to the neigh-
boring lane.
■ BSD/RCTA Approach Indi-
cator Light/Warning Buzzer
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the
following item(s) will operate to alert the
driver:
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the neigh-
boring lanes).
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle
is approaching from the left or right side
while your vehicle is reversing)
▼
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted on each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate
when a
vehicle approaching from behind is
detected.
The indicator light will flash
to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
While the indicator light is illuminating,
if the turn signal lever is operated toward
the side in which this light turned on
When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
▽ BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
You may have difficulty seeing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
- When sunlight shines directly on
it
- When the headlight beams from
a vehicle traveling behind shines
directly on it
While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward posi-
tion, even if the headlights are turned
on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light will not be
reduced. For details about the illumina-
tion brightness control dial, refer to
"Illumination Brightness Control"
P130.
▼
BSD/RCTA approach warning
buzzer (only when reversing)
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the center
information display. For details, refer to
"Car settings" P165.
▼
Safety tips regarding the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light/
warning buzzer
In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
- When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
boring lane from a lane next to the
neighboring lane
- When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
- When going beyond a pass
702801
B. 272 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
273
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
- When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane.
- When several narrowly-spaced
vehicles are approaching in a row
- In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
- When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring
lane
- Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by touching “BSD/RCTA”
- Immediately after the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the “R” position
- When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the trunk
During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
- When backing out of an angled
parking space
- When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
- When reversing on sloped roads
- When reversing at a high speed
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side
(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-
walls).
When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light may flash and the
warning buzzer may sound.
In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
- When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the corre-
sponding vehicle
- When the vehicle driving two lanes
away drives on the near side of its lane
from your vehicle
■ BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator
▼ System temporary stops
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low tempera-
tures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will disap-
pear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
702802
1
2
702877
B. 273 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
274
▼ System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
due to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detect-
ability of the radar sensors is reduced.
Once the condition is corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will disap-
pear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
■ BSD/RCTA Warning Indi-
cator
▼ System malfunction
1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
■ To Turn On/Off the BSD/
RCTA
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,
operate the center information display.
Refer to "Car settings" P165.
When the BSD/RCTA system is turned
OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the
combination meter display (color TFT) will
illuminate.
NOTE
In the following cases, turn off the
BSD/RCTA system. The system may
not operate properly due to blocked
radar waves.
- When towing the vehicle
1
2
702878
1
2
702879
702806
B. 274 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
275
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
- When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
- When using a chassis dynamom-
eter or free roller device, etc.
- When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
If the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, the last known status
of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “OFF” position with the BSD/
RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
remains deactivated the next time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
■ Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Canada-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
702883
B. 275 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
276
Mexico-spec. models
■ Handling of Radar Sensors
Radar sensors
The radar sensors, one on each side of
the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
702884
Certificado de homologacion:
RLVCOSR15-0442
Continental SRR3-A
Este equipo opera a titulo secundario,
consecuentemente, debe aceptar
interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo
equipos de la misma clase y puede no
causar interferencias a sistemas operando
a titulo primario.
702185
702807
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the
BSD/RCTA, observe the following
precautions.
Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
702808
B. 276 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
277
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
7-21. Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) System (If
Equipped)
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a
system designed to help avoid collisions
or reduce collision damage when
reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an
obstacle is detected in the reversing direc-
tion, the system will notify the driver with a
warning sound and may activate the
vehicle’s brakes automatically.
Do not expose the bumper near
the radar sensors to strong
impacts. If a sensor becomes
misaligned, a system malfunction
may occur, including the inability
to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong
shock is applied to the bumper,
be sure to contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
WARNING
Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) is not a system intended to
replace the driver’s responsibility
to check their surroundings for
vehicles or obstacles to avoid a
collision.
The driver is responsible for
driving safely. Before reversing,
be sure to first depress the brake
pedal and visually check the
surroundings.
There are some cases in which
the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
tion has limitations. The warning
sound or automatic braking may
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present.
Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking to OFF when the vehicle
is on the free roller or on the
chassis dynamometer. Other-
wise, the vehicle may move and it
may cause an accident.
Make sure to set the Automatic
Braking to OFF when towing the
vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
may move and it may cause an
accident.
The system is not designed to
detect people (including chil-
dren), animals or other moving
objects.
Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ-
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may become
unstable.
B. 277 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
278
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system records and stores the follow-
ing data when automatic braking oper-
ates. It does not record conversations,
personal information or other audio
data.
Distance from the object
Vehicle speed
Accelerator pedal operation status
Brake pedal operation status
Select lever position
Outside temperature
The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or pro-
vide the acquired data to any other
third party except under the following
conditions.
The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally
enforceable request.
Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institu-
tion for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
■ Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Overview
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate the following 2 func-
tions using 4 sonar sensors.
Sonar Audible Alarm
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system detects objects rearward and
warns the driver by warning message on
the center information display and
warning beeps.
Automatic Braking
The automatic braking detects objects
rearward and if there is a high risk of a
collision, the system decelerates the
vehicle and controls the braking to reduce
damage.
B. 278 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
279
– CONTINUED –
Starting and Operating
7
1) When reversing
2) When either strong automatic braking or torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this
case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)
3) When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain
sounding)
4) Object (e.g., a wall)
702041
1
4
2
Object Close Behind
3
Apply Brake To Hold Position
4
4
■ Operating Conditions
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may rec-
ognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and brake may activate. In
this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To can-
cel the system, refer to "Canceling
the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation"
P286.
A4600BEscusenvhch07.fm 279 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３２分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
280
1) EyeSight warning indicator
2) RAB warning indicator
3) RAB OFF indicator
The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
The RAB warning indicator is off.
The RAB OFF indicator is off.
The select lever is in the “R” position.
Sonar Audible Alarm
The sonar audible alarm is set to “ON”.
The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0
to 15 km/h).
Automatic Braking
The automatic braking is set to “ON”.
The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph
(1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system will
not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
- The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
- The RAB warning indicator is
illuminated.
In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system
cannot be operated.
- The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-
nated.
In the following cases, the functions
may not be able to properly work.
Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
- A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
applied to the sonar sensors or the
rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
- The rear bumper is modified.
- The rear bumper has been
removed and attached.
- The ground clearance is
changed due to the vehicle’s
loading condition or modification.
- There is damage to the sonar
sensors or the rear bumper near the
sonar sensor.
- The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper is
deformed.
On a steep hill, the system’s auto-
matic braking ability will be reduced.
The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard braking
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/
h). However, the system does not guar-
antee that the vehicle will be able to
avoid collisions in any situation.
If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the driver’s
operation may be prioritized. In this
case, automatic braking will not
operate.
The system may not be able to
detect and apply the brake with the
following objects.
- Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor.
- Objects that are too close to the
rear bumper when the select lever is
set to the “R” position.
- Objects with a surface which
may not reflect the sound wave
emitted from the sonar sensor such
as a chain link fence.
Objects the system is not designed
to detect and apply brake.
3
1
2
702885
B. 280 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
281
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
- Pedestrians.
- Moving objects including
moving vehicles.
- Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow.
- Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle.
- Objects that are low to the
ground such as parking blocks.
- Objects that are high above the
ground such as objects hanging
from above.
- Objects that are out of range of
the center of the vehicle in the hori-
zontal direction.
- Objects that are not in a vertical
direction.
When reversing the vehicle, the
functions may not be able to work
properly or may cause a system
malfunction if the following conditions
exist.
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby:
- Horn sound from another
vehicle.
- Engine sound from other vehi-
cles.
- Sound of an air brake.
- Vehicle detection equipment or a
sonar from another vehicle.
- A sound wave with a frequency
similar to the vehicle’s system is
transmitted near by.
- A vehicle equipped with the
same system is reversing toward
your reversing direction.
Weather conditions:
- Extremely high or extremely low
temperatures in which the area near
the sonar sensor becomes too hot
or too cold to operate.
- The sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors are
exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-
cant amount of water.
- Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
- Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing.
Parts attached to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor:
- Commercial electronic parts (fog
light, fender pole, radio antenna) or
commercial attachment parts (trailer
hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard)
are attached.
- Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or speaker,
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
- Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensor.
- The vehicle is significantly
inclined.
- The ground clearance is signifi-
cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
- When the sonar sensor is
misaligned due to a collision or an
accident.
Surrounding environment:
- A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars are
present in the reversing direction.
- When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area.
- When reversing in an area where
objects or walls are adjacent to the
vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
narrow bridges, narrow roads or
narrow garages.
- Wheel track or hole is present in
the ground of the reversing direc-
tion.
- When reversing over a drainage
cover (grating cover).
B. 281 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
282
- The path of the reversing direc-
tion is inclined such as on a steep
uphill.
- When reversing downhill.
- Reversing in a garage with a low
ceiling or a tunnel.
- A curb or step is present in the
reversing direction.
- There is a patch of snow rear-
ward.
- There is a puddle of water.
- There is an obstacle that is next
to an object.
- Going back along a wall.
- The area where the road starts
touching dirt and snow
- When reversing on an uneven
road.
In circumstances such as the
following, it may not be possible to
avoid a collision even when the system
operates normally.
- Roads are slippery.
- The tire air pressure is not
correct.
- The tires have become worn.
- Tire chains are installed.
- Tires which are not the desig-
nated size are installed.
- Emergency repairs were
performed using a puncture repair
kit.
- The suspension was modified.
- Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
- The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
■ Sonar Audible Alarm
When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system is in operation, an audible warning
beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the
driver of a potential collision.
702035
702036
702037
702388
B. 282 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
283
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and
sound warning beeps after the object
was recognized by the sonar audible
alarm.
Guideline of detecting range
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
Alert level
Range of detected
object
*
Distance
indicator
Alarm pattern
Long proximity (object detected) 35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound
Medium proximity alert (approaching
the object)
28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching
closer to the object)
20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too close to
the object)
20 in (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep
B. 283 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
284
▼ Obstacle detected and alert level
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less
When an object is detected in the
reversing direction, the range of detected
object will be shown on the center infor-
mation display.
A warning alarm will sound and,
depending on the speed, either torque
control to generate engine braking or
automatic braking will be applied.
■ Automatic Braking Operation
▼ Object close behind warning
Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message
If the system determine the risk of collision
with the object. Short warning beeps or
continuous warning beeps will sound and
either strong automatic braking or torque
control will be applied to prevent collision.
1
702886
1
702887
1
702888
1
702889
1
702890
B. 284 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
285
Starting and Operating
7
– CONTINUED –
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter
display (color TFT).
Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the center information display and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter
display (color TFT).
NOTE
The sonar audible alarm and auto-
matic braking are different in opera-
tion conditions. Therefore there are
cases in which only one of these func-
tions will activate.
▼
After the vehicle is stopped by the
system
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the
system will temporarily stop operating.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system will be disabled in the
following situations.
- When 3 seconds pass after the
vehicle is stopped
- When any door is opened
- When the RAB warning indicator
is illuminated
- When the RAB OFF indicator is
illuminated
The Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system may stop operating
temporarily in the following cases and
the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.
- Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensor
- Objects are too close to the rear
bumper when the select lever is set
to the “R” position
- The system detects sounds of a
similar frequency to the RAB sonar
1
702891
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immedi-
ately after the system stops the
vehicle by automatic braking.
Depending on the conditions of the
road surface and tires, the vehicle
may not remain stopped, possibly
leading to an accident.
702810
B. 285 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
286
- When the TRAC mode and
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
mode are turned off
- When in TRACK mode and the
Pre-Collision Braking System has
been turned off
■ Canceling the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) System
Operation
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system can be temporarily canceled by
any of the following operation.
While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the brake
pedal is depressed.
While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
The accelerator pedal is depressed
continuously (In this case, limited acceler-
ation will be canceled and the vehicle will
continue reversing.)
The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
■ Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System ON/OFF
Setting
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
can be set by operating the center infor-
mation display.
1) ON setting key of automatic braking
2) OFF setting key of automatic braking
3) ON setting key of the sonar audible
alarm
4) OFF setting key of the sonar audible
alarm
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the corre-
sponding setting is OFF.
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to
turn the setting ON.
When the automatic braking are turned
OFF, the following indicator(s) will illumi-
nate.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the corresponding function is turned ON.
NOTE
When the settings cannot be changed,
the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed
out.
Also, the following settings can be
changed by operating the center informa-
tion display.
Warning volume
Sonar audible alarm
12
34
702892
702810
B. 286 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
287
Starting and Operating
7
Automatic Braking
For details, refer to "Car settings" P165.
■ RAB Warning Indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
■ Handling of the Sonar
Sensors
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the
rear bumper. To ensure the proper opera-
tion of the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system, observe the following
precautions.
Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper
surface near the sonar sensors.
Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
Do not modify rear bumper.
Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
Do not apply high pressure water to the
sonar sensors with a high pressure car-
washing machine.
Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a
sensor becomes misaligned, a system
malfunction may occur, including inability
to detect objects in the reversing direction.
If any strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors
requires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
702811
B. 287 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
A4600BEscusenvhch07.fm 288 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後５時５８分
Driving Tips
8
Driving Tips
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ......................................290
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ...........................................290
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) .........290
8-4. Catalytic Converter .............................................291
8-5. Periodic Inspections...........................................292
8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries .............................292
8-7. Driving Tips .........................................................292
8-8. Winter Driving .....................................................293
Operation during Cold Weather ..................................293
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads............................... 295
Corrosion Protection................................................... 296
Snow Tires.................................................................... 296
Tire Chains ................................................................... 297
Rocking the Vehicle..................................................... 297
8-9. Loading Your Vehicle .........................................297
Vehicle Capacity Weight ............................................. 298
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating)................................ 299
8-10. Trailer Towing ...................................................299
B. 289 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
290
8-1. New Vehicle Break-In
Driving – the First 1,000 miles
(1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-
gency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads are replaced
with new ones.
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints
The following suggestions will help to
save your fuel.
Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to main-
tain that speed for as long as possible.
Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep the engine properly tuned.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire inflation pres-
sure label, which is located on the driver’s
center pillar. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas
(Carbon Monoxide)
WARNING
Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if
inhaled.
Always properly maintain the
engine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system
always works properly.
B. 290 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Catalytic Converter
291
Driving Tips
8
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the
exhaust system for a short time after
the engine has been shut off. This
sound is normal.
8-4. Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic
converter:
Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
Avoid racing the engine.
Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust
system.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
WARNING
Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere near
flammable materials (e.g. grass,
paper, rags or leaves), because
the catalytic converter operates
at very high temperatures.
Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
801224
B. 291 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Periodic Inspections
292
8-5. Periodic Inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”
performed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
8-6. Driving in Foreign Coun-
tries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to "Fuel Requirements"
P223.
Comply with all regulations and
requirements of each country.
8-7. Driving Tips
WARNING
Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden
braking or under other similar
conditions.
When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the
driver’s center pillar.
B. 292 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Winter Driving
293
Driving Tips
8
– CONTINUED –
8-8. Winter Driving
■ Operation during Cold
Weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that
contains an antifreeze solution. Do not
use engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
If you fill the windshield washer tank with
a fluid with a different concentration from
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechani-
cal damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
- Ride
- Handling
- Braking
- Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
- Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. The driver and all your
passengers should fasten their
seatbelts before starting to drive
in order to minimize the chance of
serious injury or death.
Do not make sharp turns or quick
maneuvers unless absolutely
unavoidable. Such actions are
dangerous as you may lose
control, possibly resulting in a
rollover which could cause death
or serious injury.
Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently to
maintain control of your vehicle.
Never to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with
water. Water entering the engine
air intake or the exhaust pipe or
water splashing onto electrical
parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. In this
case, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately. Regardless
of its depth, it can wash away the
ground from under your tires,
resulting in possible loss of trac-
tion and even vehicle rollover.
CAUTION
After driving on gravel roads or
rough roads, check the undercar-
riage of the vehicle body for any
damage, deformation, or paint
removal. If you notice any irregulari-
ties, contact a SUBARU dealer for
an inspection as soon as possible.
B. 293 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Winter Driving
294
the one used previously, purge the old
fluid from the piping between the wind-
shield washer tank and washer nozzles by
operating the washer for a certain period
of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of
the fluid remaining in the piping is too low
for the outside temperature, it may freeze
and block the nozzles.
▼
Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
mulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
▼
Parking in cold weather
CAUTION
Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the
outside temperature. If the
concentration is inappropriate,
sprayed washer fluid may freeze
on the windshield and obstruct
your view, and the fluid may
freeze in the windshield washer
tank.
State or local regulations on vola-
tile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you
park the vehicle in snow with the
engine running.
CAUTION
Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
Under either of the following
conditions, icing may develop on
the brake system, which could
cause poor braking action.
- When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
- When the vehicle has been left
parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the vehi-
cle. If there is caked snow or ice,
remove it, being careful not to
damage the disc brakes and
brake hoses and ABS harness.
B. 294 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Winter Driving
295
Driving Tips
8
– CONTINUED –
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
the “1” or “R” position. For AT models,
place the select lever in the “P” position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
▼
Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold
weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
an extended period, it is best to have the
fuel tank filled to capacity.
■ Driving on Snowy and Icy
Roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such
behavior can cause the wheels to lock,
possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS)
enhances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For infor-
mation about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to "ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)" P245 and "Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC)/TRAC System" P247.
For AT models, use the Snow mode when
driving on snowy or icy roads. For details
about how to use the mode, refer to
"Driving Mode Select Switch (If
Equipped)" P241.
▼
Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield, use the defroster with the
airflow selection in “ ” and the tempera-
ture set for maximum warmth until the
wiper blade rubbers are completely
thawed. Refer to "Climate Control Panel"
P198.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
cle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could
result in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
B. 295 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Winter Driving
296
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to "Hazard Warning Flasher"
P127.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and
freezing temperatures. Blades of this type
give superior wiping performance in
snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades
that are suitable for your vehicle.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
■ Corrosion Protection
Refer to "Corrosion Protection" P334.
■ Snow Tires
In winter, it may be possible to enhance
performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type.
You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, construction, brand and
load range and you should never mix
radial, belted bias or bias tires since this
may result in dangerous handling charac-
teristics. When you choose a tire, make
sure that there is enough clearance
between the tire and vehicle body.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
WARNING
When replacing or installing
winter tire(s), all four tires must
be the same for the following
items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the
driver’s center pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechani-
cal damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
- Ride
- Handling
- Braking
- Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
- Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
B. 296 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Loading Your Vehicle
297
Driving Tips
8
– CONTINUED –
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
■ Tire Chains
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use
of another type of traction device
(such as spring chains) may be
acceptable if use on your vehicle is
recommended by the device manufac-
turer, taking into account tire size and
road conditions. Follow the device
manufacturer’s instructions, espe-
cially regarding maximum vehicle
speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the rear wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence
because you are using a traction
device could easily lead to a serious
accident.
■ Rocking the Vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the acceler-
ator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1” (MT model)/“D” (AT model) and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slip-
pery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than in 1st (MT models).
If your vehicle is a AT model, Snow mode
can be used. For details about how to use
the mode, refer to "Driving Mode Select
Switch (If Equipped)" P241.
8-9. Loading Your Vehicle
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clear-
ance between the tires and vehicle
body.
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback or in the trunk.
Doing so may result in serious
injury.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
100094
B. 297 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Loading Your Vehicle
298
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
■ Vehicle Capacity Weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is deter-
mined by weight, not by available cargo
space. The maximum load you can carry
in your vehicle is shown on the tire infla-
tion pressure label attached to the driver’s
side center pillar. It includes the total
Stow cargo and luggage in the
trunk whenever possible.
To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything in
the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo
and luggage low, as close to the
floor as possible.
When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting
forward and causing serious
injury during a sudden stop.
Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or luggage in
or on the following locations as
the item may get under the clutch,
brake, or accelerator pedal and
prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the
driver’s vision, or hit the driver or
passengers, causing an accident:
- At the feet of the driver
- On the front passenger or rear
seats (when stacking items)
- On the rear shelf
- On the instrument panel
- On the dashboard
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
D00250
801321
B. 298 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Trailer Towing
299
Driving Tips
8
weight of the driver and all passengers,
their belongings, and any optional equip-
ment.
■ GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side center pillar shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, and
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because
they may lower the GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher load range than the originals do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions.
8-10. Trailer Towing
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that may result
from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
equipment or from any errors or omissions
in the instructions accompanying such
equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing.
801321
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to be used for trailer tow-
ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer
with your vehicle.
B. 299 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 300 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
In Case of Emergency
9
In Case of Emergency
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency.......302
9-2. Maintenance Tools..............................................302
Models with Flat Tire Repair Kit ..................................303
Models with Spare Tire ................................................303
9-3. Flat Tires ..............................................................303
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................................303
Sealing a Flat Tire (Models with the Flat
Tire Repair Kit) ...........................................................306
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(If Equipped) ...............................................................315
TPMS Screen (If Equipped)..........................................316
9-4. Jump Starting......................................................316
Battery Precautions......................................................316
How to Jump Start........................................................317
9-5. Engine Overheating ............................................319
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment..............................................................319
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment ............................................................. 319
9-6. Towing .................................................................320
Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes................. 320
Using a Flat-Bed Truck................................................ 324
Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ..................... 324
9-7. Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does
Not Operate Properly ........................................325
Locking and Unlocking ............................................... 326
Switching Power Status .............................................. 326
Starting Engine ............................................................ 326
9-8. Malfunctions of the Center Information
Display ...............................................................327
9-9. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident........328
To Restart the Engine When Involved in an
Accident ..................................................................... 328
B. 301 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency
302
9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle
in an Emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flasher are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator will also flash.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
9-2. Maintenance Tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
Jack
Jack handle
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Wheel nut wrench
901197
B. 302 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
303
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
■ Models with Flat Tire Repair
Kit
1) Under-floor storage compartment
2) Jack handle
3) Wheel nut wrench
4) Jack
5) Towing hook (eye bolt)
6) Screwdriver
7) Flat tire repair kit
■ Models with Spare Tire
1) Spare tire
2) Jack handle
3) Wheel nut wrench
4) Jack
5) Towing hook (eye bolt)
6) Screwdriver
9-3. Flat Tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
■ Changing a Flat Tire
16
4
7
5 2 3
901198
16
4
5 2 3
901216
WARNING
Use only the jack and the jack
handle provided with your
vehicle. The jack supplied with
the vehicle is designed only for
changing a tire. Never get under
the vehicle while supporting the
vehicle with this jack.
Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in
serious injury or death.
Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants
or cargo on board.
Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
can result in a severe accident.
B. 303 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
304
NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jack-
ing up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park) posi-
tion (AT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and unload all occupants and luggage
from the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk. Refer to
"Maintenance Tools" P302.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Models with spare tire: Take out the
under-floor storage compartment and turn
the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then
take the spare tire out.
Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out of
the jacking point due to a jolt and
this can result in serious injury or
death.
All passengers must exit the
vehicle before you raise it with
the jack. Raising the vehicle with
someone inside of it could result
in serious injury or death.
Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing
plate may scrape against the disc
rotor and cause noise while the
vehicle is in motion.
901050
901295
B. 304 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
305
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and
hub with a cloth.
900836
900635
901041
901006
900009
600162
B. 305 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
306
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in
the illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to "Tires" P385. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
1) Support holder
15. Models with spare tire: Store the flat
tire in the spare tire compartment. Install
with the support holder facing upward and
secure the flat tire by firmly tightening the
attaching bolt.
NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
turning the support holder upside
down.
16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
■ Sealing a Flat Tire (Models
with the Flat Tire Repair Kit)
CAUTION
If the threaded part was damaged,
you should immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause
the nuts to become loose and lead
to an accident.
1
4
2
5
3
600192
1
901296
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
WARNING
Read these instructions and
warnings carefully before sealing a
flat tire.
B. 306 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
307
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
If the tire is punctured, you can seal the
flat tire temporarily by using the flat tire
repair kit. You can seal a flat tire caused,
for example, by nails or similar objects
with less than 0.2 in (4 mm). However,
depending on the type and extent of tire
damage, some tires can only be partially
sealed or not sealed at all, and this condi-
tion may cause a loss of tire pressure. A
loss of tire pressure can affect vehicle
handling, leading to the loss of vehicle
control.
After sealing the flat tire temporarily,
change the tires with new ones as soon as
possible. We recommend that you have
the sealed tire changed by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. You may reuse the
wheel if the attached sealant is wiped off,
but the valve of the wheel must be
replaced with a new one. If you reuse the
wheel without replacing the valve, air may
leak from the valve.
For tire replacement, refer to "Tire
Replacement" P365.
▼
Safety precautions when sealing a
flat tire
Observe the following rules when sealing
a flat tire.
1) Sealing is possible
2) Sealing is not possible
Compliance with these instructions
is vital to ensuring vehicle safety.
Noncompliance with these instruc-
tions means risking tire damage,
which can affect vehicle handling
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
This may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING
Do not use the flat tire repair kit in
the following cases.
- The tire has already been
damaged as a result of being
driven in the under inflated
condition.
900483
1
2
2
- The tire damage is not located
within the visible tread of the
tire.
- The tire damage is on the
sidewall of the tire.
- When the tire has been taken
off of the wheel.
- The wheel or the tire valve of
the flat tire is damaged.
- Two or more tires have been
punctured.
- The expiration date of the
sealant has passed.
- The tire is punctured by
pointed items such as nails of
0.2 in (4 mm) or larger.
When inflating the flat tire, if the
tire inflation pressure does not
reach the green zone of the pres-
sure gauge within 10 minutes, do
not continue to seal the tire. We
recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Drive with caution and avoid
making sudden steering or
driving maneuvers.
Do not exceed a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not exceed a maximum
driving distance of 125 miles (200
km).
B. 307 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
308
Do not use tire chains on a sealed
tire.
Do not tow a trailer.
If used for a purpose other than
sealing a flat tire, the flat tire
repair kit may cause a severe
accident or injury due to the fact
that compressed air can act as an
explosive or propellant.
Safely park your vehicle on the
roadside so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic and so
that you are able to seal the flat
tire without being in danger.
Apply the parking brake, even if
the vehicle is parked on a level
road, to make sure that the
vehicle will not move.
Stop the engine before sealing
the flat tire.
Turn on the hazard warning
flasher while sealing the flat tire.
Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects like nails or screws that
have penetrated the tire. Leave
them as they are.
Never leave the flat tire repair kit
unattended while in use.
Only one tire can be repaired with
one bottle of sealant.
The tires can be repaired when
the ambient temperature is −22 °F
(−30 °C) or higher.
CAUTION
Remember that the flat tire repair
kit only provides temporary
mobility. Regulations concerning
tire repair after usage of flat tire
repair kit may differ from country
to country. We recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer
or tire dealer for advice.
Store the flat tire repair kit safely
and secure it under the floor of
the trunk. Storing it anywhere in
the passenger compartment is
not advisable because it could
strike an occupant in the event of
a sudden stop or collision and
cause injury.
Use the flat tire repair kit with
original vehicle tires only.
Do not keep the air compressor
operating for more than 10
minutes, otherwise there is a risk
of overheating.
The temperature of the air
compressor may become high.
Be careful not to burn yourself.
When raining, take measures to
prevent the air compressor from
being exposed directly to the
rain. Exposing to rain may cause
a malfunction.
Do not use air compressors other
than the one in the repair kit.
Using an air compressor other
than the one in the repair kit may
damage the tires.
Do not disassemble or modify the
air compressor to enable the use
of a power supply or a battery
other than DC 12 V.
If a temporary puncture repair is
performed with the repair kit, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (if equipped) may not
operate normally.
B. 308 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
309
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
▼ Location of the flat tire repair kit
Flat tire repair kit
The flat tire repair kit is stored in the
portion shown in the illustration.
▼
Contents of the flat tire repair kit
1) Sealant bottle
2) Quick reference guide
3) Air compressor
4) Speed limit label
The above repair kits are packed in a
plastic bag. Return them to the plastic bag
after use.
Air compressor (front side)
1) Air gauge
2) Power plug
Air compressor (rear side)
1) Hose
2) Compressor switch
901220
900880
4
3
1
2
900881
1
2
900882
2
1
B. 309 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
310
Sealant bottle
1) Hose
2) Valve
1) Expiration date
▼ How to seal the flat tire
To seal the flat tire, perform the following
steps.
First, pump in the sealant and air. Drive
the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes
or 3 miles (5 km) so that the sealant can
seal the damaged area.
Stop the vehicle again, check and, if
necessary, adjust the pressure of the
damaged tire.
After that, you can continue to drive
carefully no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
and within the maximum distance of 125
miles (200 km).
Inform all other users of the vehicle that
the tire has been temporarily sealed with
the flat tire repair kit and make them aware
of the special driving conditions to be
observed.
WARNING
Do not drink the sealant. If the
sealant is accidentally swal-
lowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the sealant splashes onto your
skin or eyes, wash it away imme-
diately with plenty of water. If
necessary, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
Keep the flat tire repair kit out of
the reach of children.
900858
1
2
If a person who is allergic to
natural rubber comes in contact
the sealant, allergy symptoms
may occur.
CAUTION
Replace the sealant bottle with a
new one before the expiration date
passes.
900883
1
B. 310 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
311
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
1. Shake the sealant bottle well. Loosen
the hose.
1) Valve
2. Connect the air compressor hose to
the valve on the bottle.
Connect the hose from the bottle to the tire
valve stem tightly.
3. Turn the bottle upside down and tilt the
bottle cap into the bottle holder of the air
compressor.
Make sure that the air compressor switch
is OFF.
4. Connect the power plug of the air
compressor into the accessory power
900898
900884
1
CAUTION
Make sure that the air
compressor switch is OFF.
The sealant may leak if the fitting
is not tight enough.
CAUTION
The sealant may leak if the fitting is
not tight enough.
900885
900886
901218
B. 311 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
312
outlet. Apply the parking brake and turn on
the ignition switch to the “ACC” position.
Turn the air compressor switch on and
adjust the air pressure to the appropriate
level (green zone of the air gauge).
NOTE
After the compressor starts to
operate, the air pressure will tempo-
rarily rise to 45 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/
cm
2
) or higher. After about 30 seconds
when all of the sealant is inside the tire,
the air pressure will lower, repre-
senting the air pressure in the tire.
In extremely low temperatures −22°F
to −4°F (−30°C to −20°C), the viscosity
of the sealant increases and the
sealant will flow more slowly. In such
temperatures, bring the sealant into
the vehicle to warm it up before use.
When mending the tire, if the air
pressure gauge is hard to read, turn
the compressor switch off once to get
an accurate reading.
5. While filling the tire with air, attach the
speed limit label on the position shown in
the illustration.
900888
psi
4
0
4
0
2
0
2
0
3030
0000
901088
CAUTION
Do not run the air compressor for
more than 10 minutes as it can
get hot. Be careful not to get
burned.
If tire pressure doesn’t reach the
green zone for 10 minutes, this kit
will be unable to seal the tire.
Please contact your SUBARU
dealer for help.
WARNING
Do not attach the speed limit label
in a position where the label hides
the warning lamp or on the steering
wheel. It may interfere with the nor-
mal operation of the airbag and lead
to a critical failure.
901219
B. 312 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
313
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
6. Turn the air compressor power switch
off when the air pressure reaches the
green zone of the air gauge.
Remove the power plug from the acces-
sory power socket.
Remove the hose after filling the tire with
air and fasten the valve cap.
Connect the hose of the bottle to the valve
of the bottle in a circular fashion to avoid
leakage of the remaining sealant.
7. Stow the kit back in the vehicle and
drive your vehicle immediately for 10
minutes or 3 miles (5 km).
psi
4
0
4
0
2
0
2
0
3030
0000
901088
900890
CAUTION
The sealant may stain clothing.
900891
WARNING
Drive carefully. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h). Driving faster than
that can result in the vehicle
shaking.
Do not use tire chains on a sealed
tire.
Do not tow a trailer.
901076
B. 313 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
314
8. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles
(5 km), whichever comes first, stop the
vehicle in a safe place to recheck the air
pressure (see step 4).
If necessary, fill the tire with air to the
appropriate air pressure again and drive
carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer
for tire, valve stem and sealant bottle
replacement.
NOTE
Connect the air compressor only to
the tire valve.
Before the tire is removed from the rim,
inform your SUBARU dealer or other tire
dealer that the tire contains sealant.
NOTE
New sealant and replacement parts
can be purchased from your autho-
rized repair shop or SUBARU dealer,
and they should also be installed into
the kit by a specialist. Empty sealant
bottles and replacement parts must be
returned to your SUBARU dealer or
disposed of in compliance with local
waste disposal regulations.
▼
Technical data of air compressor
If heavy vibrations, unsteady
steering behavior or noises occur
while driving, reduce your speed
and drive with caution to a loca-
tion where it is safe for you to
stop the vehicle. Recheck the tire
and its pressure. If the tire pres-
sure is in the red zone of the air
gauge or if there are any cracks,
bumps or similar tire damage
visible, temporary repairs cannot
be performed with the repair kit.
We recommend that you consult
with your SUBARU dealer or road
service provider.
psi
4
0
4
0
2
0
2
0
3030
0000
901089
CAUTION
If the air pressure is in red zone of
the air gauge, the kit did not
successfully seal the puncture. In
this case, please stop driving and
contact your SUBARU dealer for
help.
Do not drive your vehicle with the
sealed tire for more than 125
miles (200 km). Failure to replace
the valve stem may result in air
leakage at the valve stem.
CAUTION
The sealant bottle and speed limit
label need to be replaced after
using the flat tire repair kit.
Line voltage DC 12 V
Operating voltage DC 10 – 15 V
Amperage Max. 10 A
B. 314 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Flat Tires
315
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
■ Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with the warning
message indicated by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
702780
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and
serious personal injury could
occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all
four tires and adjust the pres-
sure to the COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the vehicle
placard on the center pillar on
the driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as pos-
sible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or
system resetting.
When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid
sealant is used, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer or other
qualified service shop as soon as
possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter when replacing
the tire. You may reuse the wheel
if there is no damage to it and if
the sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
B. 315 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Jump Starting
316
■ TPMS Screen (If Equipped)
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to "Combination Meter Display
(Color TFT)" P151.
9-4. Jump Starting
■ Battery Precautions
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
702781
WARNING
Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
oughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables in
suitable condition are available.
A running engine can be
dangerous. Keep your fingers,
hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from the cooling fan, belts
and any other moving engine
parts. Removing rings, watches
and ties is advisable.
Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are
unsure about the proper proce-
dure for jump starting, consult a
competent mechanic.
B. 316 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Jump Starting
317
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
■ How to Jump Start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
B. 317 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Jump Starting
318
B
A
(2)
(4)
(3)
(1)
901200
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
1) Connect one jumper cable to the posi-
tive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to
the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the
vehicle that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
B. 318 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Overheating
319
In Case of Emergency
9
9-5. Engine Overheating
■ If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
■ If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to "Engine Hood"
P343.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the over-
heated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to "Engine Coolant"
P349.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap
counterclockwise slowly without pressing
down until it stops. Release the pressure
from the radiator. After the pressure has
been fully released, remove the cap by
pressing down and turning it.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and
has fully cooled down. When the
engine is hot, the coolant is under
pressure. Removing the cap while
the engine is still hot could release
a spray of boiling hot coolant,
which could burn you very seri-
ously.
CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine
speed or the vehicle speed may be
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately.
B. 319 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Towing
320
9-6. Towing
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-
mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer
or a commercial towing service.
■ Towing Hook and Tie-Down
Hooks/Holes
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-
cial towing service.
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook
and wheel nut wrench from the under-floor
storage compartment.
1) Upper cover
2) Lower cover
2 Insert a screwdriver, with its tip covered
with tape or a cloth to prevent damage
to the bumper, into the cutout of the
cover and pry up to separate the upper
WARNING
Never tow vehicles with the front
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off
the ground while the front wheels
are on the ground.
This will cause the vehicle to dam-
age or cause an accident.
901277
CAUTION
Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
Never use the tie-down hole
closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
1
2
901202
B. 320 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Towing
321
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
cover. Then, pull the lower cover to
separate it.
1) Slit
3 Remove the covers from the bumper.
When removing the upper side cover,
align the hook portion of the cover with the
slit and push it through the slit to remove
the cover.
4 Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
5 Tighten the towing hook securely using
the wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Rear towing hook:
1 Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench from the under-floor
storage compartment.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force when
removing the covers. Otherwise,
they may be deformed or damaged.
1
901297
901203
901204
WARNING
Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with
proper operation of the SRS
airbag system in a frontal colli-
sion.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
B. 321 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Towing
322
1) Towing hook covers (Depending on the
vehicle, there may be only one cover.)
2 Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3 Remove the covers from the bumper. 4 Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no
longer be seen.
Tighten the towing hook securely using
the wheel nut wrench.
1
901310
901205
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force when
removing the covers. Otherwise,
they may be deformed or damaged.
901298 901206
901207
B. 322 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Towing
323
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down
the vehicle. They are not for towing.
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove
the plugs. After using the rear tie-down
WARNING
Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with
proper operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehicle
is struck from behind.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
901208
1
901209
B. 323 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Towing
324
holes, return the plugs to their original
places.
■ Using a Flat-Bed Truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” posi-
tion for AT models. Shift the shift lever into
the “1st” position for MT models.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
■ Towing with All Wheels on
the Ground
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
900488
CAUTION
Transport by flat-bed truck may
cause the headlights to become
misaligned. In such a case, have the
headlight alignment checked by a
SUBARU dealer after transporting
the vehicle by flat-bed truck.
WARNING
Never turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position while the
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
900489
B. 324 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
325
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
9-7. Access Key Fob – If
Access Key Fob Does Not
Operate Properly
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condi-
tion of the access key fob.
Locking/unlocking doors including
trunk
Switching power status
Starting engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the
access key fob is discharged, replace it
with a new one. Refer to "Replacing
Battery of Access Key Fob" P376.
CAUTION
If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
Sometime damaged vehicles
cannot be towed because of their
damaged condition. In that case,
use a flat-bed truck for transpor-
tation.
The traveling speed must be
limited to less than 20 mph (32
km/h) and the traveling distance
to less than 19 miles (30 km). For
greater speeds and distances,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
Use a flat-bed truck if there are
long distance downgrades or
steep slopes. However, do not
apply the brake pedal for a long
time because the engine braking
will not work while towing. Doing
so could overheat the brake.
Drive carefully and do not make
an impact on the towing rope by
suddenly starting.
Use a specific towing rope for
towing. If wire ropes and metal
chains are needed to be used for
towing, wrap the contact portion
of the bumper with cloth to
protect it from damage.
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
B. 325 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
326
■ Locking and Unlocking
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure
described in "Locking and Unlocking from
the Outside" P111.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
■ Switching Power Status
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT
models) or the select lever into the “P”
position (AT models).
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)
or brake pedal (AT models).
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At
the same time, the status of the push-
button ignition switch changes to either of
the following.
When the keyless access with
push-button start system is deacti-
vated: “ACC”
Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
clutch pedal (MT models) or brake pedal
(AT models) released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
■ Starting Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT
models) or the select lever into the “P”
position (AT models).
3. Depress the brake pedal (all models).
4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT
models).
1
2
202500
901210
B. 326 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
327
In Case of Emergency
9
– CONTINUED –
5. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is
completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At
the same time, the push-button ignition
switch turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
6. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
9-8. Malfunctions of the
Center Information Display
If the following screens are displayed,
temporary errors or malfunctions may
occur in the center information display.
If they are only temporary errors, the
following procedure may help to eliminate
them.
Shutting down the screen
Freezing the screen
Blacking out the screen
901210
901090
901091
901092
B. 327 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
328
Error A
Error B
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the
“OFF” position, then start the engine.
1) Volume button
3. If the center information display
cannot be recovered even though the
engine has been restarted, press and hold
the volume button for more than 10
seconds. The center information display
will start up again.
4. If the center information display is not
recovered by restarting it, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
9-9. If Your Vehicle Is
Involved in an Accident
■ To Restart the Engine When
Involved in an Accident
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
However, depending on the impact condi-
tions at the time of collision, the fuel pump
shut-off system may not operate.
901093
901094
1
901213
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find
that fuel has leaked on the ground,
do not try to restart the engine. The
fuel system has been damaged and
is in need of repair. Immediately
contact the nearest automotive ser-
vice facility. We recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer.
B. 328 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
329
In Case of Emergency
9
Perform the following procedures to
restart the engine after the system is acti-
vated.
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
B. 329 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 330 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Appearance Care
10
Appearance Care
10-1. Exterior Care .....................................................332
Washing.........................................................................332
Waxing and Polishing ..................................................333
Cleaning Alloy Wheels .................................................333
Alloy Wheels (Vehicles with Matte Painted
Wheels) .......................................................................334
10-2. Corrosion Protection ........................................334
Most Common Causes of Corrosion ..........................334
To Help Prevent Corrosion ......................................... 334
10-3. Cleaning the Interior .........................................335
Seat Fabric Material..................................................... 335
Leather Seat Materials................................................. 335
Synthetic Leather Upholstery..................................... 336
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches,
Combination Meter, and Other Plastic Surface ...... 336
Center Information Display......................................... 336
B. 331 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Exterior Care
332
10-1. Exterior Care
■ Washing
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
brush when washing down underbody,
inner fenders and suspension to effec-
tively remove mud and dirt off.
▼
Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely corro-
sive, accelerating the corrosion of under-
body components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and
suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
inside of the fenders with lukewarm or
cold water at frequent intervals to reduce
the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction of
the power steering.
When washing inner fenders,
underbody, bumpers and
protruding objects such as
exhaust pipes and exhaust
finishers, be careful to prevent
injuries from contacting sharp
ends.
Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover surface,
completely rinse off the detergent
with water. Otherwise, the cover
surface may be damaged.
B. 332 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Exterior Care
333
Appearance Care
10
– CONTINUED –
▼ Using a warm water washer
Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
■ Waxing and Polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A No.
2000 grain compound is recommended.
Never use a coarse-grained compound.
Coarser grained compounds have a
smaller grain-size number and could
damage the paint. After polishing with a
compound, coat with wax to restore the
original luster. Frequent polishing with a
compound or an incorrect polishing tech-
nique will result in removing the paint layer
and exposing the undercoat. When in
doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint
specialist.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
■ Cleaning Alloy Wheels
Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on
too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
Do not use soap containing grit to clean
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible
when it has been splashed with sea water,
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
roads treated with salt or other agents.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing
suspension components.
Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a pol-
ish or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may
be damaged.
B. 333 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Corrosion Protection
334
Do not use detergent on the wheels
when they are hot, such as after driving or
parking in hot weather.
■ Alloy Wheels (Vehicles with
Matte Painted Wheels)
As matte painted wheels require different
cleaning methods than conventional alloy
wheels, be sure to observe the following.
For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Remove dirt using water. If the wheels
are excessively dirty, use a sponge or soft
cloth dampened with a diluted neutral
detergent to remove the dirt.
To prevent the matte paint from being
damaged, make sure to observe the
following precautions:
- Do not scrub or polish the wheels
using a brush or dry cloth.
- Do not use any wheel coatings or
abrasive detergents.
10-2. Corrosion Protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
■ Most Common Causes of
Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
■ To Help Prevent Corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
Roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
Mud, sand, or gravel
Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
B. 334 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cleaning the Interior
335
Appearance Care
10
– CONTINUED –
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
10-3. Cleaning the Interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
■ Seat Fabric Material
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor-
oughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using
a solution of mild soap and lukewarm
water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
NOTE
As the color of the meter visor may
transfer, do not place anything on top
of it.
■ Leather Seat Materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause leather to become
brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain
its resiliency, leather should be cleaned
monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.
Before cleaning leather upholstery,
vacuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and
lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm
water and mild soap, taking care not to
soak the leather or allow water to pene-
trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle
circular motion while cleaning the leather -
do not rub or apply extreme pressure.
Wipe the leather again with another clean,
slightly damp cloth to remove soap
residue and dry with a soft cloth.
Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt
spots may be treated with a commercial
leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning
solvents, leather oils, varnishes or
polishes on your leather as it will dry out
the leather finish.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any simi-
lar materials. Doing so could dam-
age the surface and cause the color
to deteriorate.
B. 335 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cleaning the Interior
336
If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,
which is characteristic of genuine leather.
■ Synthetic Leather Upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacu-
uming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow
the soap to soak in for a few minutes and
wipe off with a clean, damp cloth.
Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable
for synthetic leather materials may be
used when necessary.
■ Instrument Panel, Console
Panel, Switches, Combina-
tion Meter, and Other Plastic
Surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
■ Center Information Display
To clean the center information display,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
vents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that
contain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical compo-
nents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
CAUTION
Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
B. 336 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance and Service
11
Maintenance and Service
11-1. Maintenance Schedule .....................................339
11-2. Maintenance Precautions.................................339
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment..............................................................340
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment..............................................................340
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine
Compartment While the Engine Is Running ............341
11-3. Maintenance Tips..............................................341
Removing and Reinstalling Clips................................341
11-4. Engine Hood......................................................343
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview.......................345
11-6. Engine Oil ..........................................................346
Engine Oil Consumption..............................................346
Checking the Oil Level .................................................346
Changing the Oil and Oil Filter....................................347
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ..........................347
Synthetic Oil..................................................................348
11-7. Cooling System.................................................348
Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections..........................348
Engine Coolant .............................................................349
11-8. Air Cleaner Element..........................................350
Replacing the Air Cleaner Element.............................350
11-9. Spark Plugs .......................................................352
Recommended Spark Plugs........................................352
11-10. Drive Belt .........................................................352
11-11. Automatic Transmission Fluid ......................352
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ..........................352
11-12. Differential Gear Oil ........................................353
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ..........................353
11-13. Manual Transmission Oil ...............................353
Recommended Grade and Viscosity ..........................353
11-14. Brake Fluid ......................................................353
Checking the Fluid Level ............................................ 353
Recommended Brake Fluid ........................................ 354
11-15. Clutch Fluid (MT models) ...............................354
Checking the Fluid Level ............................................ 354
Recommended Clutch Fluid ....................................... 355
11-16. Brake Booster .................................................355
11-17. Brake Pedal .....................................................356
11-18. Clutch Pedal (MT models) ..............................356
11-19. Replacement of Brake Pad and Lining..........356
Breaking-in of New Brake Pads and Linings ............ 357
11-20. Parking Brake Stroke......................................357
11-21. Tires and Wheels ............................................358
Types of Tires .............................................................. 358
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(If Equipped)............................................................... 358
Tire Inspection ............................................................. 360
Tire Pressures and Wear............................................. 361
Wheel Balance ............................................................. 363
Wear Indicators............................................................ 363
Rotational Direction of Tires....................................... 364
Tire Rotation................................................................. 364
Tire Replacement......................................................... 365
Wheel Replacement..................................................... 365
11-22. Alloy Wheels....................................................366
11-23. Windshield Washer Fluid ...............................366
11-24. Replacement of Wiper Blades........................367
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly............................ 368
Windshield Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 369
11-25. Battery..............................................................370
11-26. Fuses................................................................371
11-27. Installation of Accessories ............................373
B. 337 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance and Service
11-28. Replacing Bulbs..............................................373
Headlights.....................................................................373
Backup Light ................................................................ 373
Trunk Light ...................................................................374
Other Bulbs...................................................................374
Adjusting Headlight Aim .............................................374
11-29. Replacing Battery............................................375
Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob .......................376
B. 338 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance Schedule
339
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
11-1. Maintenance Schedule
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items
required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items
required to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
11-2. Maintenance Precau-
tions
When maintenance and service are
required, it is recommended that all work
be done by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize your-
self with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the
vehicle. Remember that some of
the materials in the vehicle may
be hazardous if improperly used
or handled, for example, battery
acid.
Your vehicle should only be
serviced by persons fully compe-
tent to do so. Serious personal
injury may result to persons not
experienced in servicing vehi-
cles.
Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
Never get under the vehicle
supported only by a jack. Always
use safety stands to support the
vehicle.
Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as a
garage or other closed areas.
Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only by
your SUBARU dealer.
Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly wash
them out with clean water.
B. 339 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance Precautions
340
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against per-
forming these services on a SUBARU
vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flush-
ing systems use chemicals and/or sol-
vents which have not been tested or
approved by SUBARU. SUBARU war-
ranties do not cover any part of the
vehicle which is damaged by adding or
applying chemicals and/or solvents
other than those approved or recom-
mended by SUBARU.
■ Before Checking or
Servicing in the Engine
Compartment
■
When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seatbelt
pretensioner system, or attempt
to take its connectors apart, as
that may activate the system or it
can render it inoperative. NEVER
use a circuit tester for these
wiring. If your SRS airbag or
seatbelt pretensioner needs
service, consult your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Check the inside of the engine
compartment to see if there are
any cloths and tools left. If they
are left inside, they may be a
cause of malfunction and fire.
WARNING
Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine is stopped.
Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even when
the engine is stopped. If your
body or clothes come into
contact with a rotating fan, that
could result in serious injury. To
avoid risk of injury, always turn
the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position and confirm
that the operation indicator on
the switch is turned off. Then take
the access key fob out from the
vehicle.
Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system
temporarily place that system in
the service mode to prevent it
from unexpectedly starting the
engine.
B02092
B. 340 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance Tips
341
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
■ When Checking or Servicing
in the Engine Compartment
While the Engine Is Running
11-3. Maintenance Tips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
element or specific bulbs.
■ Removing and Reinstalling
Clips
▼ Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
▽ Type A and D clips
Type A clips
Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
CAUTION
Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand to
slip off the belt cover and result in
an unexpected injury.
Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down
completely. Doing so may result
in a burn or other injury. Note that
the oil filter becomes very hot
when the engine is running and
remains hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
WARNING
A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from
the cooling fan, belts and any other
moving engine parts. Removing
rings, watches and ties is advisable.
B01036
B01536
B. 341 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Maintenance Tips
342
▽ Type B clips
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
▽ Type C clips
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
▼
Reinstalling clips
Type A clips
Type B clips
B00924 B00798 B01024
B00925
B. 342 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Hood
343
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
Type C clips
Type D clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
11-4. Engine Hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
B00799
B01537
CAUTION
Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
Check that the end of the hood
stay is inserted into the slot. If it is
not inserted properly, the hood
may drop and cause injury.
B02093
B02094
B. 343 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Hood
344
3. Release the secondary hood lock by
moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above
its closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
B02095
WARNING
Always check that the hood is prop-
erly locked before you start driving.
If it is not, it might fly open while the
vehicle is moving and block your
view, which may cause an accident
and serious bodily injury.
B. 344 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Compartment Overview
345
Maintenance and Service
11
11-5. Engine Compartment Overview
1
9
3211
810 467 5
B02096
1) Battery (page 370)
2) Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)
(page 354)
3) Brake fluid reservoir (page 353)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 366)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 346)
6) Air cleaner case (page 350)
7) Engine oil filter (page 347)
8) Engine oil level gauge (page 346)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 349)
10) Radiator cap (page 349)
11) Main fuse box (page 371)
B. 345 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Oil
346
11-6. Engine Oil
■ Engine Oil Consumption
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance
intervals:
When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
When the engine oil is of lower quality
When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
more frequently. Different drivers in the
same car may experience different
results. If your oil consumption rate is
greater than expected, contact your
authorized SUBARU retailer who may
perform a test under controlled conditions.
■ Checking the Oil Level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait for at
least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan before checking the level.
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acciden-
tally straining yourself.
Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and
viscosity.
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
CAUTION
If the level gauge cannot be pulled
out easily, twist the level gauge
right and left, then gently pull it out.
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
1
3 2
B02097
B. 346 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Engine Oil
347
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of
the level gauge. The engine oil level must
be judged by the lowest of the two levels.
If the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
full level when the engine is cold.
■ Changing the Oil and Oil
Filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
NOTE
Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil
filter. Fully trained mechanics are on
standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize
the special tools, spare parts and
recommended oil for this work, and
also, used oils are properly disposed
of.
If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
■ Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
Refer to "Engine Oil" P381.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. How-
ever, in hot weather, oil of higher vis-
cosity is required to properly lubricate
the engine.
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the engine
oil filter when removing the oil
filler cap. Doing so may result in a
burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
1
2
3
B02098
Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and
viscosity.
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
B. 347 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cooling System
348
■ Synthetic Oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to "Engine
Oil" P381. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
11-7. Cooling System
■ Cooling Fan, Hose and
Connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to "Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge" P129.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and
has cooled down completely. Since
the coolant is under pressure, you
may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
CAUTION
Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
that does not require the first
change for 11 years/137,500 miles
(11 years/220,000 km). This
coolant should not be mixed with
any other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. When neces-
sary to top off the coolant for any
reason, use only SUBARU
SUPER COOLANT.
If the SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
is diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
B02099
B. 348 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Cooling System
349
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to "Fuses" P371. If the fuse is not
blown, have the cooling system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
If the frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary between vehicle service visits, it is
recommended that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUBARU
dealer to check for leaks, damage, or
looseness.
■ Engine Coolant
▼ Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
1) Fill up to this level.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
1
2
B02100
1
B02101
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
B00018
B. 349 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Air Cleaner Element
350
▼ Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
11-8. Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the
element.
■ Replacing the Air Cleaner
Element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Under extremely dusty conditions, replace
it more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The
air cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
B. 350 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Air Cleaner Element
351
Maintenance and Service
11
1) Clip
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
3. If you find large foreign objects such
as leaves inside the air cleaner case,
remove the foreign objects.
4. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the trans-
verse side face as shown in the illustra-
tion.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the two projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
1
B02102
B02103
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case
is extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer
and have the air cleaner case
cleaned.
B02104
B02105
B. 351 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Spark Plugs
352
11-9. Spark Plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
■ Recommended Spark Plugs
Refer to "Electrical System" P385.
11-10. Drive Belt
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement
of the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn, we
recommend that contact your SUBARU
dealer.
11-11. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However,
have the oil inspected by your SUBARU
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
■ Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
"Fluids" P383.
B. 352 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Differential Gear Oil
353
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
11-12. Differential Gear Oil
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
■ Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
"Manual Transmission and Differential
Gear Oil" P383.
11-13. Manual Transmission
Oil
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However,
have the oil inspected by your SUBARU
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
■ Recommended Grade and
Viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
"Manual Transmission and Differential
Gear Oil" P383.
11-14. Brake Fluid
■ Checking the Fluid Level
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
WARNING
Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed mois-
ture can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
When adding brake fluid, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the reservoir.
Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
B. 353 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Clutch Fluid (MT models)
354
Visually check the brake fluid level of the
reservoir monthly on the even surface.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from
the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid
level is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to
“MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
■ Recommended Brake Fluid
Refer to "Fluids" P383.
11-15. Clutch Fluid (MT
models)
■ Checking the Fluid Level
Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1
2
B02107
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even
if they are the same brand.
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed mois-
ture can cause improper clutch
operation.
If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
When you add clutch fluid, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
B. 354 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Brake Booster
355
Maintenance and Service
11
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
Visually check the fluid level of the reser-
voir monthly on the even surface. Be sure
to check the clutch fluid level from the
outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level is
below “MIN”, top up clutch fluid to “MAX”.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
■ Recommended Clutch Fluid
Refer to "Fluids" P383.
11-16. Brake Booster
The brake booster utilizes the vacuum
produced by the vacuum pump to reduce
the force required to depress the brake
pedal.
The vacuum in the brake booster may be
insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed
when the engine is stopped or after the
vehicle has been parked for a long period
of time. It such cases, it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal using greater
force than usual.
Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Check the fluid level for the clutch
system at the inboard side of the
reservoir. You cannot check the
fluid level at the outboard side of
the reservoir.
1
2
B02106
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even
if they are the same brand.
B. 355 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Brake Pedal
356
11-17. Brake Pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the mainte-
nance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
11-18. Clutch Pedal (MT
models)
Check the clutch pedal free play
according to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
11-19. Replacement of Brake
Pad and Lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite
the scraping noise from the
audible brake pad wear indicator,
it will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replacement.
It is recommended that you
disconnect the vehicle battery
before replacing the brake pad.
However, it is dangerous to
disconnect the vehicle battery.
We recommend that you have
your SUBARU dealer replace the
brake pad and lining.
700040
B. 356 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Parking Brake Stroke
357
Maintenance and Service
11
The disc brakes have audible wear indica-
tors on the brake pads. If the brake pads
wear close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Breaking-in of New Brake
Pads and Linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows.
▼
Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal
lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
▼
Parking brake lining
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx-
imately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake lever travel. If
the parking brake lever travel is out of the
specified range, adjust it by turning the
adjusting nut located on the parking brake
lever.
11-20. Parking Brake Stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be cer-
tain to pull the lever up slowly and
gently.
B02108
B. 357 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
358
11-21. Tires and Wheels
■ Types of Tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
▼ Summer tires
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are summer tires.
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
▼
A
ll season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
▼
Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
NOTE
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in.
(4mm) on snow tires the effectiveness
of snow tires is lost.
▼ Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more
rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when
compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires or tire chains on snowy
and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a
speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
NOTE
Low profile tires may cause greater
damage than usual to the wheel when
receiving impact from the road sur-
face. Therefore pay attention to the fol-
lowing:
Be sure to use proper tire inflation
pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement,
curbs and other road hazards. Failure
to do so may lead to severe tire and
wheel damage.
■ Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (If Equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system
provides the driver with a warning
message by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low. The
tire pressure monitoring system will acti-
vate only when the vehicle is driven. Also,
this system may not react immediately to
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pres-
sures higher than those shown on the tire
inflation pressure label. Specifically,
inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa,
0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for every difference of 10°F
B. 358 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
359
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
(5.6°C) between the temperature in the
garage and the temperature outside. By
way of example, the following table shows
the required tire pressures that corre-
spond to various outside temperatures
when the temperature in the garage is
60°F (15.6°C).
Example:
Tire size: 215/40R18 85Y
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)
Example:
Tire size: 215/45R17 87W
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)
If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-
nates when you drive the vehicle in cold
outside air after adjusting the tire pres-
sures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire
pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 25mph (40km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction
between tires and the road surface
causes the tires to warm up. After illumi-
nation of the low tire pressure warning
light, any increase in the tire pressures
caused by an increase in the outside air
temperature or by an increase in the
temperature in the tires can cause the low
tire pressure warning light to go off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement,
therefore, you should have the work
performed by a SUBARU dealer.
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
30°F (−1°C) 38 (260, 2.6) 38 (260, 2.6)
10°F (−12°C)
40 (275,
2.75)
40 (275,
2.75)
−10°F
(−23°C)
42 (290, 2.9) 42 (290, 2.9)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
30°F (−1°C) 38 (260, 2.6) 38 (260, 2.6)
10°F (−12°C)
40 (275,
2.75)
40 (275,
2.75)
−10°F
(−23°C)
42 (290, 2.9) 42 (290, 2.9)
B. 359 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
360
■ Tire Inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage, nails,
and stones. At the same time, check
the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected to
harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive
over curbs, potholes or on other
rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
speed down to a walking pace or
less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make
sure the tires are not pressed
against the curb when you park
the vehicle.
If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line,
one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to
the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
Tires should be replaced if:
– You have tire damage such
as cuts, splits, cracks deep
enough to expose the fabric or
bulges indicating internal
damage
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Oth-
erwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble for tire and sensor replacement
and/or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
B. 360 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
361
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
– A tire goes flat repeatedly or
cannot be properly repaired
due to the size or location of a
cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with
your SUBARU dealer.
Any tires over 6 years old must
be checked by a qualified techni-
cian even if they have seldom or
never been used or damage is
not obvious.
■ Tire Pressures and Wear
Maintaining the correct tire pres-
sures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month
and before any long journey.
Tire inflation pressure label
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge
to adjust the tire pressures to the
values shown on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation
pressure label is located on the
center pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately 4.3
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the
tire becomes warm.
The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or has
been driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km).
Incorrect tire pressures detract from
controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
Correctly inflated tires (tread
worn evenly)
B02109
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
B. 361 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
362
Roadholding is good, and steering
is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also
lower.
Under inflated tires (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel
consumption is also higher.
Over inflated tires (tread worn in
center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road
surface bumps and dips, possibly
resulting in vehicle damage.
B00050 B00051
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly
become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruc-
tion of the tires. The resulting
loss of vehicle control could
lead to an accident.
B00052
B. 362 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
363
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
■ Wheel Balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the
steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts
from the vehicle’s straight-line
stability. It can also cause steering
and suspension system problems
and abnormal tire wear. If you
suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them
checked and adjusted by your
SUBARU dealer. Also have them
adjusted after tire repairs and after
tire rotation.
NOTE
The suspension system is
designed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
■ Wear Indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3)
Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the
vehicle’s running stability.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
12
3
B00327
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the accept-
able limit and must be
replaced immediately. With a
tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to
hydroplane. The resulting loss
of vehicle control can lead to
an accident.
B. 363 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
364
■ Rotational Direction of Tires
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall
1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing
forward direction when the wheels
are fitted.
■ Tire Rotation
Vehicles equipped with 4
nonunidirectional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidi-
rectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
tions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the
“Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened.
R
O
T
A
T
I
O
N
1
B00550
1
B00546
1
B00545
B. 364 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Tires and Wheels
365
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
■ Tire Replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are opti-
mally matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and were selected to give the best
possible combination of running perfor-
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and
construction matching those shown on the
tire inflation pressure label and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire inflation pressure
label.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern),
construction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
■ Wheel Replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the
driver’s center pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), serious mechani-
cal damage could be caused to
the drivetrain of the car, and
affect the followings.
- Ride
- Handling
- Braking
- Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
- Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously reduce
controllability, resulting in an
accident.
B. 365 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Alloy Wheels
366
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000
km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
11-22. Alloy Wheels
Alloy wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
When any of the wheels is removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for alloy wheels.
11-23. Windshield Washer
Fluid
1) “LOW” position
The washer fluid level can be checked by
observing the position of the level on the
liquid-covered holes in the gauge.
If the level falls below the second hole
from the bottom (the “LOW” position), add
washer fluid.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing
during turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
1
B02110
B. 366 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacement of Wiper Blades
367
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
If you fill the windshield washer tank with
a fluid with a different concentration from
the one used previously, purge the old
fluid from the piping between the wind-
shield washer tank and washer nozzles by
operating the washer for a certain period
of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of
the fluid remaining in the piping is too low
for the outside temperature, it may freeze
and block the nozzles.
11-24. Replacement of Wiper
Blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and
streaking on the glass. If you cannot
remove the streaks after operating the
windshield washer or if the wiper opera-
tion is jerky, clean the outer surface of the
windshield (or rear window) and the wiper
blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a
neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner.
After cleaning, rinse the windshield and
wiper blades with clean water. The wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when
you rinse the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
CAUTION
Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the
outside temperature. If the
concentration is inappropriate,
sprayed washer fluid may freeze
on the windshield and obstruct
your view, and the fluid may
freeze in the windshield washer
tank.
Be careful foreign matter does
not contaminate the washer fluid
when filling the tank. Contamina-
tion could cause malfunctions,
such as clogging the pump.
State or local regulations on vola-
tile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
B. 367 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacement of Wiper Blades
368
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
■ Windshield Wiper Blade
Assembly
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
First raise the driver’s side wiper arm and
then raise the front passenger’s side wiper
arm.
1) Lock cover
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, open the lock cover to release the
lock.
Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind-
shield.
While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the orig-
inal positions. Otherwise, the
windshield surface may be
scratched.
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
B01729
1
B02111
B02112
B. 368 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacement of Wiper Blades
369
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow.
4. When installing the wiper blade
assembly, align it with the wiper arm
connection part and then slide it in the
opposite direction of removal to install.
After installing the wiper blade assembly,
close the lock cover and check that the
connection part is locked completely.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
■ Windshield Wiper Blade
Rubber
1) Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
B02113
1
B02114
B00504
1
B. 369 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Battery
370
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
11-25. Battery
B02115
1
B02116
WARNING
Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and
lighters. Never expose a battery
to an open flame or electric
sparks. Batteries give off a gas
which is highly flammable and
explosive.
For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working
near any battery. Never lean over
a battery.
Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint
because battery fluid is a corro-
sive acid. If battery fluid gets on
your skin or in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush the area with water
thoroughly. Seek medical help
immediately if acid has entered
the eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention
immediately.
B. 370 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuses
371
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
11-26. Fuses
NOTE
Fuse rating and using circuit are
described on the fuse box cover.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and
anything connected to it WHILE
you are at the same time in
contact with any other metallic
portion of the vehicle because a
short circuit will result.
Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
Charge the battery in a well-venti-
lated area.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause
cancer. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
B02117
B. 371 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Fuses
372
1) Fuse puller
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment. Also, the fuse
puller are stored in the fuse box.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
when removing it from the main fuse box.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other elec-
trical controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and turn off all electrical accesso-
ries.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indi-
cates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
1
B02118
B01008
12
B00975
B. 372 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Installation of Accessories
373
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
11-27. Installation of Acces-
sories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
11-28. Replacing Bulbs
■ Headlights
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
■ Backup Light
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
If a genuine SUBARU accessory has
been installed to the rear bumper,
check the manual included with the
accessory.
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there
is the risk of sustaining a burn
injury.
CAUTION
Before replacing a backup light,
stop the engine and allow the
exhaust pipes and surrounding
parts to cool sufficiently. As the
bulbs are near the exhaust pipes,
there is a risk of being burned.
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage.
Using a bulb of different wattage
could result in a fire. For the spec-
ified wattage of each bulb, refer to
"Bulb Chart" P387. For replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
B02119
B. 373 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacing Bulbs
374
1. Remove the clips.
2. Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the rear bumper cover.
■ Trunk Light
■
Other Bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the
bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer
if necessary.
■ Adjusting Headlight Aim
1) Adjustment bolt A
2) Adjustment bolt B
▼ Before checking the headlight
aiming
1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of
gasoline and the area around the head-
light is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver’s seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
B02120
B02121
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
B02122
2
1
B02156
B. 374 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacing Battery
375
Maintenance and Service
11
– CONTINUED –
▼ Headlight aim adjustment
1) Adjustment direction mark
1. Turn the bolt A clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust it. Remember
the direction of the rotation and number of
rotations.
2. Turn bolt B the same number of turns
and in the same direction as step 1.
NOTE
If the headlight aim cannot be
adjusted, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
To inspect of the headlight aim posi-
tion, consult a SUBARU dealer.
11-29. Replacing Battery
The access key fob may be discharged
under the following conditions.
The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard
distance
Replace the battery with a new one.
1
B02157
B02158
CAUTION
Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob/trans-
mitter when replacing battery.
Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any
removed parts; children could
swallow them.
There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
B. 375 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacing Battery
376
NOTE
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be
careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
Use a new battery.
After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key fob/transmitter
functions properly.
■ Replacing Battery of Access
Key Fob
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
equivalent
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
CAUTION
When removing or fitting the
access key fob cover, make sure
that the plastic part does not
come off or become misaligned.
Before replacing the battery,
remove any static electricity.
1
2
202500
B01977
B01546
B. 376 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Replacing Battery
377
Maintenance and Service
11
4. Insert a new battery with its positive
(+) side facing upward as shown in the
figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
B01547
B01542
B. 377 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 378 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
12
Specifications
12-1. Specifications....................................................380
Dimensions ...................................................................380
Engine............................................................................380
Fuel ................................................................................381
Engine Oil......................................................................381
Manual Transmission and Differential Gear Oil.........383
Fluids.............................................................................383
Engine Coolant .............................................................384
Electrical System..........................................................385
Tires...............................................................................385
Brake Pedal ...................................................................385
Brake Disc .....................................................................386
Brake Pad ......................................................................386
12-2. Bulb Chart..........................................................387
Safety Precautions ...................................................... 387
Bulb Chart .................................................................... 388
12-3. Vehicle Identification ........................................390
12-4. Function Settings..............................................391
Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center
Information Display................................................... 391
Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding
Center Information Display and Combination
Meter Display (Color TFT)......................................... 391
Function Settings and Adjustments Performed
by a Dealer ................................................................. 391
B. 379 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
380
12-1. Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
■ Dimensions
in (mm)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission
RWD: Rear Wheel Drive
■ Engine
Item Dimensions
Drive system RWD
Transmission type AT MT
Overall length 167.9 (4265)
Overall width 69.9 (1775)
Overall height 51.6 (1310)
Wheelbase 101.4 (2575)
Tread
Front 59.8 (1520)
Rear 61.0 (1550)
Ground clearance*
1
5.1 (130)
Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)
Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.70 × 3.39 (94.0 × 86.0)
B. 380 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
381
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –
■ Fuel
*1: For details, refer to "Fuel" P223.
■ Engine Oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to "Engine Oil" P346.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recom-
mended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
▼
Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
▼
Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4
Fuel requirement
*1
Unleaded gasoline with 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher
Fuel tank capacity 13.2 US gal (50 liters, 11 Imp gal)
Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
B. 381 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
382
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING” or SN PLUS with the
words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not avail-
able, 5W-30 conventional oil may
be used if you need to add oil.
However, you should change to
0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil
change.
Adding the oil from low level to full
level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Changing the oil:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.3 US qt (5.0 liters, 4.4 Imp qt)
ZOM0754
ZOM0293
ZOM0294
0W-20*
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020 80 10040
B. 382 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
383
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –
■ Manual Transmission and Differential Gear Oil
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory.
*4: This type of manual transmission oil can be used. However, using this type of oil will increase fuel consumption.
If oil other than “Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV 75W” is used, the following may be experienced:
The overall performance and function of the transmission may be adversely affected.
Rattling noises may occur during idling and fuel consumption may increase.
Never use different brands together.
*5: Using a differential gear oil other than “Differential Gear Oil LX” may cause noise, vibrations and increased fuel consumption. Never use different
brands together.
■ Fluids
Oil Manual transmission oil Differential gear oil
Oil grade
Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV 75W*
3
API GL-4 SAE 75W
*4
Differential Gear Oil LX*
3
Other gear oil that meets API GL-5 SAE 75W-85 or GL-5 SAE 75W-
90 specifications*
5
Oil capacity*
1
2.3 US qt (2.2 liters, 1.9 Imp qt) 1.22 US qt (1.15 liters, 1.01 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
"Manual Transmission Oil" P353 "Differential Gear Oil" P353
Fluid
Fluid type
*1
Fluid capacity
*2
Remarks
*3
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(AT models)
ATF WS 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)
"Automatic Transmission
Fluid" P352
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid
― "Brake Fluid" P353
Clutch fluid (MT models)
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid
―
"Clutch Fluid (MT models)"
P354
B. 383 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
384
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
■ Engine Coolant
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to "Cooling System" P348.
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
AT models 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
MT models 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)
B. 384 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
385
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –
■ Electrical System
■
Tires
*1: If equipped
*2: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to "Changing a Flat Tire" P303.
■ Brake Pedal
in (mm)
*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf) while the engine is running.
Battery type
U.S. spec and Canada spec models 75D23L
Except U.S. spec and Canada spec models 55D23L
Alternator 12 V-150 A
Spark plugs ZXE27HBR8 (DENSO)
Tire size 215/45R17 87W 215/40R18 85Y
Wheel size 17 × 7 1/2J 18 × 7 1/2J
Pressure
Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear
Spare tire
*1
Size ― 215/40R18 85Y
Pressure ―
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
88.5 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12.2 kgf·m)
*2
Pedal clearance 2.91 (74)*
Pedal free play 0.02 - 0.05 (0.5 - 1.5)
B. 385 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Specifications
386
■ Brake Disc
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
■ Brake Pad
in (mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.06 (1.5)
B. 386 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Bulb Chart
387
Specifications
12
12-2. Bulb Chart
■ Safety Precautions
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there
is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
B. 387 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
– CONTINUED –
Bulb Chart
388
■ Bulb Chart
NOTE
Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
A C 2 E
F
G4J I 5 3 H
DB 1
C00473
B. 388 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Bulb Chart
389
Specifications
12
Wattage Bulb No.
1) Map lights 12 V-8 W ―
2) Trunk light 12 V-3.8 W SAE #194
3) Backup lights 12 V-16 W W16W
4) Door step lights 12 V-5 W W5W
5) Vanity mirror lights 12 V-2 W ―
A) Front turn signal lights ――
B) Low and high beam headlights ――
C) High-mounted stop light ――
D) License plate lights ――
E) Rear side marker lights ――
F) Tail and stop lights ――
G) Stop lights ――
H) Rear turn signal lights ――
I) Front side marker lights ――
J) Front position lights ――
Daytime running lights ――
B. 389 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Vehicle Identification
390
12-3. Vehicle Identification
8
7
6
2
3
4
5
1
C00477
1) Vehicle identification number under the
floor carpet of the right-hand front seat
2) Emission control label
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle
placard)
5) Vehicle identification number label
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
B. 390 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Function Settings
391
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –
12-4. Function Settings
■ Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display
Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to
"Center Information Display (CID)" P160.
■ Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display and Combination Meter
Display (Color TFT)
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
■ Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 115
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 110
Item Function Available settings
Factory default set-
ting
Keyless access with push-button
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Trunk open without key ON/OFF ON
Remote keyless entry system
Remote keyless entry system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Panic function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Vehicle finder function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote trunk open function
*1
Operation of trunk opening by access key
fob
Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing
and holding
Pressing and holding
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation of the auto
dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
B. 391 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Function Settings
392
*1: If equipped
*2: For U.S. spec. models
Daytime running light system
*2
Daytime running light system Operation/Non-operation Operation
High beam assist function
*1
High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Illumination
Operation when the doors are unlocked Operation/Non-operation Operation
Operation after the engine switch is
turned off
Operation/Non-operation Operation
Interior light illumination upon approach Operation/Non-operation Operation
Interior light illumination Operation/Non-operation Operation
Active sound control Active sound control Operation/Non-operation Operation
Item Function Available settings
Factory default set-
ting
B. 392 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13-1. For U.S.A............................................................394
13-2. Tire Information.................................................394
Tire Labeling .................................................................394
Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure.......................396
Glossary of Tire Terminology......................................397
Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices ..........401
Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine .....................402
Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle
Load Capacities..........................................................405
Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on
Handling and Stopping and on Tires........................405
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit .................406
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ........406
TREADWEAR ............................................................... 407
TRACTION AA, A, B, C ................................................ 407
TEMPERATURE A, B, C............................................... 407
13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA) ......................408
13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in
Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating
to the Vehicle (Canada) ....................................408
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 393 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
For U.S.A.
394
13-1. For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of Federal
Regulations “Title 49, Part 575”.
13-2. Tire Information
■ Tire Labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful informa-
tion on the tire.
▼ Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
▽ P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as
passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷
section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
▽ Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
tions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index.
Second, the letter designation indi-
cates the tire’s speed rating.
Example:
P 205 / 60 R 16
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5)
P 205 / 60 R 16 91 V
Size designation
(6) (7)
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 394 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
395
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
– CONTINUED –
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load a
tire can carry at the speed indicated
by its speed symbol, at maximum
inflation pressure.
For example, “
91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600 kg),
“89
” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “
V
” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
▼ Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its indi-
vidual elements.
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(3) Tire Size Code
(4) Tire Type Code
(5) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “
01
” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
▼ Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
WARNING
Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out,
damaged, repaired,
retreaded, or otherwise
altered from their original
condition. If tires are
repaired, retreaded, or other-
wise altered, they may not be
suitable for original equip-
ment tire designed loads and
speeds.
DOT XX XX XXX XXXX
(2)(1) (3) (4) (5)
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 395 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
396
▽ Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa (51
PSI) MAX. PRESS”
▽ Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
▽ Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
▽ Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLY-
ESTER”
▽ Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG)
For details, refer to
"Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards"
P406.
■ Recommended Tire Inflation
Pressure
▼ Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For the recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
refer to
"Tires"
P385.
▼ Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the vehi-
cle. Putting a load rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean the
vehicle can be loaded up to
the tire’s rated load.
B02109
XX
D00155
TIRE
PNEU
FRONT
AVANT
PXXX/XXRXX XXXKPA, XXPSI
REAR
ARRI¨RE
PXXX/XXRXX XXXKPA, XXPSI
TXXX/XXDXX XXXKPA, XXPSI
SPARE
DE SECOURS
SIZE
DIMENSIONS
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
PRESSION DES
PNEUS FROID
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT
SEE OWNERS
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
VOIR LE MANUEL
DE LUSAGER
POUR PLUS DE
RENSEIGNEMENTS
FRONT
AVANT
REAR
ARRI¨RE
SEATING CAPACITY
NOMBRE DE PLACES
TOTAL
XXX
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXlbs.
Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dØpasser XXXkg ou XXXlb.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 396 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
397
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
– CONTINUED –
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
▼ Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp
increase in temperature could
cause tread separation, and failure
of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss
of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
▼ Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper
inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short
distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also,
the tire pressures are affected by
the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure
to increase. Be careful not to
mistakenly release air from a warm
tire to reduce its pressure.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-
installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when
inflated, bears the load.
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 397 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
398
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
Cracking
Any parting within the tread,
sidewall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside
surface of a tubeless tire that
contains the inflating medium within
the tire.
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/
or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounting on a
vehicle.
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure for that tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 398 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
399
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
– CONTINUED –
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a
vehicle as specified in the third
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger
cars, multipurpose passenger vehi-
cles, and trucks, that have a gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of
rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel
or other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 399 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
400
Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s
designation for a rim by style or
code.
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound
from the cord material in the
sidewall.
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110,
compared to the ASTM E1136-93
Standard Reference Test Tire,
when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered
Surfaces, and that is marked with
an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least
one sidewall.
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Tread rib
A tread section running
circumferentially around a tire.
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section) and
dividing by 2.
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 400 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
401
– CONTINUED –
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
Table 1 ― Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seat-
ing capacity, num-
ber of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution
in a normally loaded
vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
■ Tire Care – Maintenance and
Safety Practices
Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become
visible. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an acci-
dent.
To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires
every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). For
information about tire rotation, refer
to
"Rotational Direction of Tires"
P364.
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 401 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
402
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened. For informa-
tion about the tightening torque and
tightening sequence for the wheel
nuts, refer to
"Flat Tires"
P303.
■ Vehicle Load Limit – How to
Determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
B-pillar. Locate the statement “
The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs
”
on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all passen-
gers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight of
optional equipment)
For information about vehicle
loading, refer to
"Loading Your Vehicle"
P297.
▼
Calculating total and load
capacities varying seating
configurations
Calculate the available load
capacity as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard with
the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or 800
lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
D00245
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 402 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
403
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
– CONTINUED –
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load
capacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load
capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 705 lbs (320 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 705 lbs (320 kg)
= 95 lbs (43 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
D00250
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
+ 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 881 lbs (400 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 881 lbs (400 kg)
= 81 lbs ( 37 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 403 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
404
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard with
the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or 800
lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =
176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load
capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
D00356
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 628 lbs (285 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 628 lbs (285 kg)
= 172 lbs (78 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
D00357
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 404 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Tire Information
405
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
– CONTINUED –
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load
capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
■ Determining Compatibility of
Tire and Vehicle Load Capac-
ities
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the
maximum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GVWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and
each axle’s GAWR are shown on
the vehicle certification label affixed
to the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the
vehicle’s suspension, axles and
other parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
■ Adverse Safety Conse-
quences of Overloading on
Handling and Stopping and
on Tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
Stopping distance will increase.
Brakes could overheat and fail.
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg)
+ 40 lbs (18 kg)
+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 822 lbs (373 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Child restraint)
(Tongue load)
(Occupant)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 822 lbs (373 kg)
= 22 lbs ( 10 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 405 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
406
Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear that
will shorten vehicle life.
Tires could fail.
Tread separation could occur.
Tire could separate from its rim.
■ Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “
XXX
” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 ×
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
13-3. Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear, trac-
tion, and temperature resistance.
This is to aid the consumer in
making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on
passenger cars. However, they do
not apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempo-
rary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 406 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
407
Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
13
All passenger car tires must
conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
■ TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■ TRACTION AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
■ TEMPERATURE A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteris-
tics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 407 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Reporting Safety Defects (USA)
408
13-4. Reporting Safety
Defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investi-
gation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your
dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
13-5. How to Contact Trans-
port Canada in Order to
Report a Safety Concern
Relating to the Vehicle
(Canada)
A4600BEscusenvhch13.fm 408 ページ ２０２１年７月９日 金曜日 午後４時３９分
Index
14
Index
B. 409 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
410
A
Abbreviation .............................................................................P4
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .............................................P245
Warning light....................................................................P140
Access key
Warning indicator.................................................. P143, P144
Access key fob
Warning light....................................................................P144
Accessories..........................................................................P373
Accessory power outlet ........................................................P215
Active sound control.............................................................P242
Air cleaner element ..............................................................P350
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control ................................................P200
Manual climate control system ........................................P201
Air filtration system...............................................................P205
Airflow mode selection .........................................................P201
Alarm system .......................................................................P114
All season tires.....................................................................P358
Alloy wheel ...........................................................................P366
Cleaning ..........................................................................P333
Antenna
Roof antenna ...................................................................P210
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .............................................P245
Arming the system ...............................................................P114
Ashtray .................................................................................P217
AT OIL TEMP warning light..................................................P138
Audio
Antenna system .............................................................. P210
Set .................................................................................. P210
Audio system-linked display ................................................ P156
Auto dimmer cancel function ............................................... P131
Auto on/off headlights.......................................................... P174
Sensor ............................................................................ P176
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ............................................ P186
Automatic
Transmission .................................................................. P236
Automatic climate control operation .................................... P200
Automatic headlight beam leveler ....................................... P182
Warning light................................................................... P150
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor
(ALR/ELR).......................................................................... P40
Automatic transmission
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................ P138
Average vehicle speed ........................................................ P153
B
Battery
Drainage prevention function.......................................... P113
Jump starting .................................................................. P316
Replacement (access key fob) ....................................... P376
Replacement (keyless access with push-button start system)
....................................................................................... P376
Vehicle battery ................................................................ P370
Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ................................................. P269
Booster seat .......................................................................... P54
B. 410 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
411
Index
14
Bottle holder ........................................................................ P215
Brake
Assist .............................................................................. P244
Booster..................................................................P244, P355
Disc ................................................................................. P386
Fluid ......................................................................P353, P383
Pad.................................................................................. P356
Parking..................................................................P256, P357
Pedal............................................................................... P356
System ............................................................................ P244
Brake pedal
Free play ......................................................................... P356
Reserve distance ............................................................ P356
Brake system....................................................................... P244
Warning light ................................................................... P140
Braking ................................................................................ P244
Tips ................................................................................. P244
Breaking-in of new brake pads............................................ P357
BSD/RCTA .......................................................................... P268
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer ......................... P272
OFF indicator .................................................................. P273
OFF switch...................................................................... P274
Warning indicator ..................................................P150, P274
Warning light ................................................................... P274
Bulb
Chart ............................................................................... P387
Replacing ........................................................................ P373
C
Camera
Rear view camera ........................................................... P263
Catalytic converter............................................................... P291
Center console..................................................................... P214
Center information display (CID) ......................................... P160
Cleaning .......................................................................... P336
Changing
Coolant............................................................................ P350
Flat tire ............................................................................ P303
Oil and oil filter ................................................................ P347
Charge warning light............................................................ P137
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light... P136
Checking
Brake pedal free play ...................................................... P356
Brake pedal reserve distance.......................................... P356
Clutch function ................................................................ P356
Clutch pedal free play ..................................................... P356
Coolant level ................................................................... P349
Fluid level (brake fluid).................................................... P353
Fluid level (clutch fluid).................................................... P354
Fluid level (washer fluid) ................................................. P366
Oil level (engine oil)......................................................... P346
Child restraint systems ..........................................................P46
Installation of a booster seat ............................................. P54
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ....................................P51
Lower and top tether anchorages .....................................P55
Top tether anchorages ...................................................... P58
Child safety..............................................................................P6
B. 411 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
412
Chime
Light.................................................................................P174
Seatbelt ...........................................................................P131
Cleaning
Alloy wheels.....................................................................P333
Center information display...............................................P336
Interior .............................................................................P335
Ventilation grille ...............................................................P204
Climate control system.........................................................P198
Automatic.........................................................................P200
Manual.............................................................................P201
Clock ....................................................................................P172
Clutch
Fluid...................................................................... P354, P383
Pedal ...............................................................................P356
Combination meter display (color TFT)................................P151
Audio system-linked display ............................................P156
Drive information .............................................................P153
Driving support system setting display ............................P157
Exclusive content for SUBARU BRZ ...............................P154
Navigation system-linked display ....................................P156
Settings display ...............................................................P157
Warning message display ...............................................P159
Compass ..............................................................................P186
Console ................................................................................P214
Control switch light...............................................................P174
Coolant...................................................................... P349, P384
Cooling system.....................................................................P348
Corrosion protection.............................................................P334
Cruise control ...................................................................... P260
Indicator light .................................................................. P149
Set indicator light ............................................................ P149
Cup holder........................................................................... P214
D
Daytime running light (DRL) system.................................... P180
Defogger.............................................................................. P185
Defrosting ............................................................................ P203
Differential gear oil ....................................................P353, P383
Dimensions.......................................................................... P380
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators.............................. P245
Door
Door unlock selection function........................................ P100
Locks .............................................................................. P111
Open indicator ................................................................ P141
Double trip meter................................................................. P128
Drive belts ........................................................................... P352
Drive information ................................................................. P153
Driving
Car phone/cell phone.......................................................... P9
Drinking............................................................................... P7
Drugs .................................................................................. P8
Foreign countries ............................................................ P292
Pets..................................................................................... P9
Snowy and icy roads....................................................... P295
Tips .............................................................P235, P240, P290
Tired or sleepy .................................................................... P8
Winter ............................................................................. P293
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 412 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２４分
Index
413
Index
14
Driving distance................................................................... P153
Driving mode select switch.................................................. P241
Driving range ....................................................................... P153
Driving support system setting display ................................ P157
Driving time ......................................................................... P153
E
Electrical system ................................................................. P385
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system.............. P246
Warning........................................................................... P141
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)..................................... P40
Engine
Compartment overview ................................................... P345
Coolant..................................................................P349, P384
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...............................P7, P290
Hood ............................................................................... P343
Hood release knob.......................................................... P343
Oil..........................................................................P346, P381
Overheating .................................................................... P319
Start & stopping .............................................................. P229
Engine oil temperature gauge ............................................. P153
Event data recorder............................................................... P11
Exclusive content for SUBARU BRZ ................................... P154
Exterior care ........................................................................ P332
F
Flat tire ................................................................................ P303
Flat tire repair kit.................................................................. P309
Technical data of air compressor.................................... P314
Floor mat.............................................................................. P218
Fluid level
Automatic transmission ................................................... P352
Brake............................................................................... P353
Clutch .............................................................................. P354
Front
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF...........................P71
Seatbelt pretensioners ...................................................... P44
Front seats............................................................................. P30
Forward and backward adjustment...................................P33
Head restraint adjustment .................................................P34
Manual seat....................................................................... P33
Reclining ...........................................................................P33
Seat heater........................................................................P35
Seat height adjustment (driver's seat)...............................P33
Fuel...................................................................................... P223
Economy hints................................................................. P290
Filler door and cap .......................................................... P224
Filler lid and cap .............................................................. P224
Gauge ............................................................................. P129
Requirements........................................................P223, P381
Tank capacity .................................................................. P381
Fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption............................................... P153
Current fuel consumption................................................ P153
Fuses................................................................................... P371
G
Gasoline............................................................................... P223
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 413 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後４時２５分
Index
414
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....................................P299
G-force .................................................................................P154
G-force (peak hold function).................................................P154
Glove box .............................................................................P214
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).................................P299
H
Hazard warning flasher ............................................. P127, P302
Head restraint adjustment......................................................P34
Headlight
Aim adjustment................................................................P374
Beam leveler....................................................................P182
Bulb replacement.............................................................P373
Bulb wattage....................................................................P388
Control switch ..................................................................P174
Flasher.............................................................................P176
Indicator light ...................................................................P150
Welcome lighting function................................................P175
High Beam Assist
Function...........................................................................P177
Indicator light ...................................................................P150
High beam indicator light......................................................P150
High/low beam change (dimmer) .........................................P176
Hill start assist......................................................................P257
Indicator light ...................................................................P150
To activate/deactivate......................................................P259
HomeLink
®
...........................................................................P186
Hook
Towing and tie-down....................................................... P320
Horn..................................................................................... P195
Hose and connections......................................................... P348
I
Icy road surface warning light.............................................. P151
Illumination brightness control............................................. P130
Immobilizer .......................................................................... P108
Indicator light (security indicator light) ............................ P148
Indicator light
BSD/RCTA OFF ............................................................. P150
BSD/RCTA warning ........................................................ P150
Cruise control.................................................................. P149
Cruise control set............................................................ P149
Door open ....................................................................... P141
Drive mode ..................................................................... P148
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF ....... P71, P135
Headlight......................................................................... P150
High beam ...................................................................... P150
High Beam Assist ........................................................... P150
Hill start assist................................................................. P150
Malfunction ..................................................................... P136
RAB OFF ........................................................................ P151
REV ................................................................................ P130
Security........................................................................... P148
Select lever/Gear position............................................... P149
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .............................. P150
TRAC OFF...................................................................... P142
B. 414 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
415
Index
14
Turn signal ...................................................................... P149
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) OFF ............................... P143
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) operation .............P142, P143
Inside mirror ........................................................................ P186
Interior lights........................................................................ P212
Internal trunk lid release handle .......................................... P121
J
Jack and jack handle ........................................................... P302
Jack-up point ....................................................................... P303
Jump starting....................................................................... P316
K
Key ........................................................................................ P94
Replacement................................................................... P108
Keyless access with push-button start system ...................... P94
Disabling keyless access functions................................. P103
Locking and unlocking doors ............................................ P98
Opening trunk ................................................................... P98
Warning chimes and warning indicator .................P106, P143
When access key fob does not operate properly............ P325
L
Lane Change Assist (LCA).................................................. P269
Leather seat materials......................................................... P335
LED headlight warning light.......................................P150, P373
LED headlights .................................................................... P373
Light
Backup............................................................................ P373
Control switch.................................................................. P174
Daytime running .............................................................. P180
Map ................................................................................. P212
Trunk............................................................................... P374
Turn signal ......................................................................P182
Loading your vehicle............................................................ P297
Low fuel warning light .......................................................... P141
Low tire pressure warning light ............................................ P138
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) .................. P55
Lower and top tether anchorages .......................................... P55
M
Maintenance
Precautions ..................................................................... P339
Schedule ......................................................................... P339
Seatbelt ............................................................................. P43
Tips ................................................................................. P341
Tools ............................................................................... P302
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ...... P136
Manual
Climate control ................................................................ P201
mode (automatic transmission) ....................................... P239
Seat................................................................................... P33
Transmission................................................................... P233
Transmission oil ....................................................P353, P383
Map light .............................................................................. P212
Meters and gauges .............................................................. P127
Mirror defogger .................................................................... P185
Mirrors.................................................................................. P186
B. 415 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
416
N
Navigation system-linked display .........................................P156
New vehicle break-in driving ................................................P290
O
Odometer .............................................................................P128
Oil filter .................................................................................P347
Oil level
Differential gear ...............................................................P353
Engine .............................................................................P346
Manual transmission........................................................P353
Oil pressure warning light.....................................................P137
One-touch lane change........................................................P182
Outside
Mirrors .............................................................................P194
Mirror defogger ................................................................P185
Overheating engine..............................................................P319
P
Parking
Brake ...............................................................................P256
Brake stroke ....................................................................P357
Tips..................................................................................P256
Periodic inspections .............................................................P292
Petrol fuel .............................................................................P223
PIN code Access..................................................................P100
Power
Door locking switch..........................................................P112
Outlets ............................................................................ P215
Outside mirrors ............................................................... P194
Steering .......................................................................... P243
Steering warning light ..................................................... P141
Window switches ............................................................ P117
Windows ......................................................................... P116
Power and torque curve ...................................................... P155
Precautions against vehicle modification ......................P46, P89
Preparing to drive ................................................................ P228
Push-button
Ignition switch ................................................................. P125
Starting and stopping engine .......................................... P229
R
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).......................................... P269
Rear seat............................................................................... P37
Folding down .................................................................... P37
Rear seatbelt warning light.................................................. P133
Rear view camera ............................................................... P263
Rear window
Defogger ......................................................................... P185
Recommended
Brake fluid....................................................................... P383
Clutch fluid ............................................................ P355, P383
Differential gear oil.......................................................... P383
Engine oil ........................................................................ P381
Manual transmission oil .................................................. P383
Spark plugs..................................................................... P385
Refueling ............................................................................. P224
B. 416 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
417
Index
14
Remote control mirror switch............................................... P194
Remote keyless entry system.............................................. P109
Replacing battery ............................................................ P376
Replacement
Access key fob battery.................................................... P376
Air cleaner element ......................................................... P350
Battery of access key fob................................................ P376
Brake pad and lining ....................................................... P356
Cabin air filter.................................................................. P205
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ............ P111
Wiper blades ................................................................... P367
Replacing bulbs................................................................... P373
Backup light .................................................................... P373
Headlight......................................................................... P373
Trunk light ....................................................................... P374
REV indicator light and buzzer ............................................ P130
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system.......................... P277
OFF indicator light........................................................... P151
ON/OFF setting.....................................................P151, P286
Warning indicator ..................................................P151, P287
Rocking the vehicle ............................................................. P297
Roof antenna....................................................................... P210
S
Safety
Precautions when driving.................................................... P5
Symbol ................................................................................ P4
Warnings............................................................................. P3
Sealing flat tire .....................................................................P306
Flat tire repair kit ............................................................. P309
How to seal ..................................................................... P310
Safety precautions .......................................................... P307
Seat
Fabric .............................................................................. P335
Front.................................................................................. P30
Heater ............................................................................... P35
Height adjustment .............................................................P33
Rear .................................................................................. P37
Seatbelt............................................................................P5, P39
Fastening .......................................................................... P41
Maintenance......................................................................P43
Pretensioners .................................................................... P44
Safety tips ......................................................................... P39
Warning light and chime.................................................. P131
Security
Alarm system .................................................................. P114
Immobilizer...................................................................... P108
Indicator light................................................................... P148
Select lever
Position indicator.............................................................P149
Shift lock function ............................................................ P238
Settings display.................................................................... P157
Shoulder pretensioner ...........................................................P44
Snow tires..................................................................P296, P358
Snowy and icy roads............................................................ P295
Sounding a panic alarm .......................................................P110
Spark plugs................................................................P352, P385
B. 417 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
418
Specifications .......................................................................P380
Speedometer........................................................................P127
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ..... P5, P60
Monitors.............................................................................P87
Servicing............................................................................P88
Warning light...................................................P69, P87, P135
Starting & stopping engine...................................................P229
State emission testing (U.S. only)........................................P227
Steering lock ........................................................................P232
Steering Responsive Headlight............................................P180
OFF indicator...................................................................P150
OFF indicator light ...........................................................P150
ON/OFF setting .................................................... P150, P180
Warning light....................................................................P150
Steering wheel
Lock .................................................................................P232
Power ..............................................................................P243
Tilt/telescopic...................................................................P195
Stopwatch ............................................................................P155
Storage compartment...........................................................P213
Summer tires........................................................................P358
Sun visors ............................................................................P213
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................................P60
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) .......................P60
Curtain airbag ....................................................................P80
Side airbag ........................................................................P80
Synthetic leather upholstery.................................................P336
T
Tachometer ......................................................................... P127
Temperature gauge............................................................. P129
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ................................................................. P138
Tether (child restraint system).......................................P55, P58
Tie-down hooks ................................................................... P320
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................................. P195
Tire ............................................................................P358, P385
All season tires ............................................................... P358
Chains............................................................................. P297
Information...................................................................... P394
Inspection ....................................................................... P360
Pressures and wear........................................................ P361
Replacement................................................................... P365
Rotation .......................................................................... P364
Size and pressure........................................................... P385
Types .............................................................................. P358
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)........P252, P315, P358
Screen ............................................................................ P254
Warning light................................................................... P138
Tires and wheels ................................................................. P358
Tools.................................................................................... P302
Top tether anchorages ..................................................P55, P58
Towing................................................................................. P320
All wheels on the ground ................................................ P324
Flat-bed truck.................................................................. P324
Hooks.............................................................................. P320
Tie-down hooks .............................................................. P320
B. 418 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
419
Index
14
TPMS screen....................................................................... P254
TRACK mode ...................................................................... P250
Trailer
Towing ............................................................................ P299
Trip meter ............................................................................ P128
Trunk lid............................................................................... P119
Release handle ............................................................... P121
Trunk light............................................................................ P374
Turn signal
Indicator lights................................................................. P149
Lever ............................................................................... P182
U
Under-floor storage compartment........................................ P219
USB power supply ............................................................... P216
V
Vanity mirror ........................................................................ P213
Light ................................................................................ P213
Vehicle
Capacity weight............................................................... P298
Identification.................................................................... P390
Symbols .............................................................................. P5
Vehicle data recording........................................................... P10
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
OFF indicator light........................................................... P143
OFF switch...................................................................... P249
Operation indicator light ........................................P142, P143
Warning light ...................................................................P142
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)/TRAC
System ............................................................................ P247
Ventilator.............................................................................. P198
Voltmeter ............................................................................. P153
W
Warning and indicator lights ................................................ P131
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system................ P143
Seatbelt ........................................................................... P131
Warning indicator
RAB.......................................................................P151, P287
Warning light
ABS ................................................................................. P140
Access key ...................................................................... P143
Access key fob ................................................................ P144
AT OIL TEMP.................................................................. P138
Automatic headlight beam leveler ................................... P150
Brake system .................................................................. P140
Charge ............................................................................ P137
CHECK ENGINE............................................................. P136
Icy road surface............................................................... P151
Keyless access with push-button start system................ P143
LED headlight.................................................................. P150
Low fuel........................................................................... P141
Low tire pressure.............................................................P138
Master ............................................................................. P151
Oil pressure..................................................................... P137
B. 419 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
Index
420
Power steering.................................................................P141
Seatbelt ...........................................................................P131
SRS airbag system..........................................................P135
Steering Responsive Headlight .......................................P150
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)........................................P142
Warning message display....................................................P159
Warranties................................................................................P2
Washing ...............................................................................P332
Waxing and polishing ...........................................................P333
Wear indicators ....................................................................P363
Welcome lighting function ....................................................P175
Wheel
Alloy.................................................................................P366
Balance............................................................................P363
Nut tightening torque ............................................ P303, P385
Replacement ...................................................................P365
Windows...............................................................................P116
Windshield
Washer fluid.....................................................................P366
Wiper and washer switches.............................................P183
Wiper blades....................................................................P368
Winter
Driving .............................................................................P293
Tires...................................................................... P296, P358
Wiper and washer ................................................................P183
B. 420 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
B. 421 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 422 ページ ２０２１年７月１２日 月曜日 午後１時１５分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 423 ページ ２０２１年７月１２日 月曜日 午後１時１５分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 424 ページ ２０２１年７月１２日 月曜日 午後１時１５分
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²²
A4600BEscusenvhix01.fm 425 ページ ２０２１年７月１２日 月曜日 午後１時１５分
GAS STATION REFER ENCE
GAS STATION REFERENCE
■ Fuel
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI
(98 RON) or higher.
■ Fuel octane rating
▼ RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
▼
AKI
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
■ Limit of ethanol content
No more than 15%
■ Fuel tank capacity
13.2 US gal (50 liters, 11 Imp gal)
■ Engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further
details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative
engine oil described as follows.
API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE
CONSERVING” or SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE
CONSERVING”
or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certi-
fication mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to "Engine Oil"
P381.
■ Engine oil capacity
Changing the oil:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.3 US qt (5.0 liters, 4.4 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about main-
tenance and service, refer to "Engine Oil" P346.
■ Cold tire pressure
Refer to "Tires" P385.
B. 422 ページ ２０２１年７月５日 月曜日 午後３時３３分
